Training Guide
TM-1830 AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1) Draw
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
This page is intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 2
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Revision Log Date
Revision
Description
Author
Reviewed
Approved
14.0 14.03. 3.20 2013 13
0.1 0.1
Issu Issued ed for for Revi Review ew AVEV AVEVA A E3D E3D™ (1.1)
SB & JP
-
-
22.03.2013
0.2
Reviewed
SB & JP
KB
-
09.0 09.04. 4.20 2013 13
1.0 1.0
Issu Issued ed for for Trai Traini ning ng AVEV AVEVA A E3D E3D™ (1.1)
SB & JP
KB
SH
18.0 18.03. 3.20 2014 14
1.1 1.1
Issu Issued ed for for Revi Review ew AVEV AVEVA A E3D E3D™ (1.1)
CT
-
-
23.04.2014
1.2
Reviewed
CT
SB
-
28.0 28.04. 4.20 2014 14
2.0 2.0
Issu Issued ed for for Trai Traini ning ng AVEV AVEVA A E3D E3D™ (1.1)
CT
SB
KB
29.1 29.10. 0.20 2015 15
2.1 2.1
Issu Issued ed for for Revi Review ew AVEV AVEVA A E3D E3D™ (2.1)
CT & JP
-
-
23.11.2015
2.2
Reviewed
CT & JP
GT GT & MB
-
25.1 25.11. 1.20 2015 15
3.0 3.0
Issu Issued ed for for Trai Traini ning ng AVEV AVEVA A E3D E3D™ (2.1)
CT & JP
GT & MB
KB
Updates Change highlighting will be employed for all revisions. Where new or changed information is presented section headings will be highlighted in Yellow.
Suggestion / Problems If you have a suggestion about this manual or the system to which it refers please report it to AVEVA Training & Product Support at
[email protected] This manual provides documentation relating to products to which you may not have access or which may not be licensed to you. For further information on which products are licensed to you please refer to your licence conditions. Visit our website at http://www.aveva.com
Disclaimer 1.1
AVEVA AVEVA does does not warra warrant nt that that the use use of the the AVEVA AVEVA softw software are will will be be uninte uninterrup rrupted, ted, error-f error-free ree or or free from viruses.
1.2
AVEVA AVEVA shall shall not be liabl liable e for: loss loss of of profits profits;; loss loss of busine business; ss; deple depletio tion n of goodwil goodwilll and/or and/or similar similar losses; loss of anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data data or informa informatio tion; n; any special special,, indirec indirect, t, consequ consequenti ential al or pure economi economic c loss, loss, costs, costs, damages damages,, charges or expenses which may be suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether whether such losses are suffered directly directly or indirectly, indirectly, or arise in contract, contract, tort (including (including negligence) negligence) or otherwise.
1.3
AVEVA's total liability liability in contract, contract, tort (including (including negligence), negligence), or otherwise, otherwise, arising in connection connection with with the performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's claim is brought.
1.4
Clause Clauses s 1.1 1.1 to 1.3 shall shall apply apply to the the fullest fullest extent extent permissi permissible ble at law. law.
1.5
In the the event event of any any confl conflict ict betwe between en the abov above e clauses clauses and and the analo analogou gous s clauses clauses in in the soft softwar ware e licence under which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 3
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Copyright Notice All intellectual property rights, including but not limited to, copyright in this Training Guide and the associated documentation documentation belongs belongs to or is licensed licensed to AVEVA Solutions Limited or its affiliates. affiliates. All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its affiliates companies. The information contained in this Training Training Guide and associated associated documentation documentation is commercially commercially sensitive, sensitive, and shall not be adapted, copied, copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or medium by any means (including photocopying or electronic means) without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, AVEVA Solutions Limited expressly requires that the Disclaimer included in this Training Training Guide and this Copyright notice is prominently prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made. Licenses Licenses issued by the Copyright Licensing Licensing Agency or any other reproduction rights organisation organisation do not apply. If any unauthorised acts are carried out in relation to this copyright work, a civil claim for damages may be made and or criminal prosecution may result. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its affiliate companies shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a thir third d party party's 's inte intell llec ectu tual al prope property rty rights rights aris arisin ing g from from the the use use of this this Train Trainin ing g Guid Guide e and and asso associ ciat ated ed documentation. @AVEVA Solutions Limited 2015
Trademark Notice AVEVA™, AVEVA Everything3D Everything3D™, AVEVA AVEVA E3D E3D™, [AVEVA [AVEVA Tags], Tags], Tribon Tribon and all AVEVA AVEVA product product and service service names are trademarks of AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries Use of these trademarks, product and service names belonging to AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries is strictly forbidden, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Group plc or AVEVA Solutions Limited. Any unauthorised use may result in a legal claim being made against you. Flue Fluent nt is a trade trade mark mark of Micro Microso soft ft Corpo Corpora rati tion on.. The Fluent Fluent user user inte interfa rface ce is lice licens nsed ed from from Micro Microso soft ft Corporation by AVEVA and use of the Fluent trademark is strictly forbidden. All other trademarks belong to their respective owners and cannot be used without the permission of the owner.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 4
CONTENTS Introductio Introd uction n ............... ............................... ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................. ................................. ..........................11 ..........11 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7
Aim .................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... ............... 11 Objectives ........................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ ................................................................ 11 Prerequisites .................................................................. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. 11 Course Structure...................................................................................... Structure............................................................................................................................. ....................................... 12 Using this Guide ........................................................................ ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 12 Entering Entering a Draw Session........... Session................. ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ .......... .... 12 Setting Setting up the Training Course Course ...... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ..... 14
Draw Dra w Ove Overvie rview w & Work Workflow flow.............. ............................... ................................. ................................ ................................ ................................ .................. ..15 15 2.2
Overview .......................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 15 Draw Workflow ................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................ 16
Draw Dra w Use Userr Inter Interface face.............. .............................. ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................21 ................21 User Interface Overview Overview ......................................................................... ................................................................................................................. ........................................ 21 3.2 Project Project Menu & Tabs ..... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ .......... .... 22 3.2.1 Project Menu.................................................................................................. Menu.............................................................................................................................. ............................ 23 3.2.2 Draw Tab ........... ................ ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ......... ... 25 3.2.3 Annotate Annotate Tab ........... ................. ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 25 3.2.4 Update Tab ........... ................ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ..... 26 3.2.5 Tools Tab............... Tab.................... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ......... ... 26 3.2.6 Manage Tab............................................................................................................................... Tab............................................................................................................................... 26 3.2.7 View: Format 2D Tab.......... Tab................ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........ ... 27 3.2.8 View: Format 3D Tab.......... Tab................ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........ ... 27 3.2.9 Label Tools: Tools: Format Tab .......... ................ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 28 3.3 Status Bar ........................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ ................................................................ 28 3.4 Active Properties ........................................................................ ............................................................................................................................ .................................................... 29 3.4.1 Current Current Owner ........... ................. ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........ ... 30 3.4.2 Visual Layers ........... ................. ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 31 3.4.3 Format Painter................ Painter...................... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ......... ... 34 3.5 Properties Grid................................................................ Grid ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................ 35 3.6 The Draw Canvas ...... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ..... 36 3.6.1 Grips & Object Object Snapping Snapping ........... ................. ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... 36 3.6.2 Draw Power Power Wheel ........... ................ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ..... 37
Exercise Exer cise 1
Draw Use Userr Inter Interface face............... ............................... ................................ ................................ ................................ ...............................39 ...............39
User Defa Defaults........................ ults........................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................41 ................41 Setting User Defaults.................................................................................................................... Defaults...................................................................................................................... .. 41 User Defaults & Draw Interface ...................................................................... ................................................................................................. ........................... 42
Exercise Exer cise 2
User Defa Defaults......................... ults......................................... ................................ ................................ ................................ ...............................43 ...............43
Draw Dra w Hier Hierarch archy y & Shee Sheett Crea Creation tion ............... ............................... ................................ ................................ ................................. ........................45 .......45 Draw Hierarchy.................................................................................................................. Hierarchy................................................................................................................................ .............. 45 5.2 Draw Hierarc Hierarchy hy & Sheet Creation Creation from from Template Template ......... ............... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ....... 46 5.2.1 New Drawing Type ........... ................ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ .......... .... 46 5.2.2 Template Template Selection............... Selection..................... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ..... 46 5.2.3 Drawing Drawing Creation ........... ................. ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 47 5.3 Drawing Drawing & Sheet Sheet Creation Creation from Template – A Worked Worked Example....... Example............. ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ..... 50 5.4 Sheet Creation.................................................................................................................. Creation................................................................................................................................. ............... 53 5.4.1 From Template ...................................................................... .......................................................................................................................... .................................................... 53 5.4.2 Quick Sheet ............ .................. ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ......... ... 54
Exercise Exer cise 3
Hierarchy Hiera rchy & Shee Sheett Crea Creation tion............... ............................... ................................. ................................. ................................ .................. 55
Views.................. Views.. ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................. ................... ..57 57 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
View Element.................................................................. Element ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. 57 Properties Grid................................................................ Grid ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................ 58 View Visual Style............................................................................................................................. Style............................................................................................................................. 58 View Manipulation Manipulation - Grips.............. Grips.................... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ .......... .... 59
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
6.5 6.6
View Interaction Interaction - Draw Power Wheel......... Wheel.............. ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ....... 61 View Creation Creation Methods ...... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ .......... .... 62
Exercise Exer cise 4
View Ele Element......................... ment......................................... ................................ ................................ ................................ ...............................64 ...............64
View Creation: Quick View & 3D Format ...................................................................... ...................................................................................... ................ 65 7.2 Quick View Creation Creation ..... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........ ... 65 7.2.1 Quick View Creation Creation – A Worked Example............... Example..................... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ....... 65 7.3 The 3D View.................................................................... View ..................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. 67 7.3.1 Accessing Accessing the 3D View - View Creation Creation ............ .................. ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ......... .... 68 7.3.2 Accessing Accessing the 3D View - View View Modificatio Modification n .......... ............... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 69 7.4 View: Format 3D Tab .................................................................. ...................................................................................................................... .................................................... 70 7.4.1 Manage Group............... Group..................... ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 70 7.4.2 Scale .......................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 71 7.4.3 Direction..................................................................................................................................... Direction...................................................................................................................... ............... 72 7.4.4 Define Define Limits............... Limits..................... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... .......... .... 73 7.4.5 Remember Remember ........... ................ ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ......... ... 75 7.4.6 Clipping...................................................................... Clipping ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 77 7.4.7 Section ...................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. 77 7.4.8 Complete .................................................................. ................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. 79 7.5 View Creatio Creation n from Model Model – A Worked Worked Example........ Example.............. ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ....... 79 7.8 View Manipulation Manipulation – A Worked Worked Example......... Example............... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ......... .... 84
Exercise Exer cise 5
View Cre Creation ation from Mode Modell ............... ............................... ................................ ................................ ................................ ....................87 ....87
View Creation: Basic View & 2D Format........................................................................ Format....................................................................................... ............... 90 8.2 Basic View Creation................................................................................ Creation........................................................................................................................ ........................................ 90 8.3 Basic View – A Worked Example ........ .............. ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ .......... .... 90 8.4 View: Format 2D Tab .................................................................. ...................................................................................................................... .................................................... 92 8.4.1 View .......................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................... ................................................................. 92 8.4.2 Modify ........... ................. ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... 92 8.4.3 View Limits.......................................................................................... Limits................................................................................................................................. ....................................... 93 8.4.4 Scale & Direction Direction ........... ................ ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........ ... 94 8.4.5 Representati Representation on Styles ........... ................. ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........ ... 94 8.4.6 Local Rules ........... ................ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ..... 96 8.4.7 Drawlist Drawlist Manager.......... Manager................ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........ ... 97 8.4.8 Update ........... ................. ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ......... ... 99 8.4.9 Laser .......................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 99 8.5 Creating Creating a User Defined Defined View View – Worked Worked Example....... Example............. ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ..... 99 8.5.1 Populating Populating the Drawlist Drawlist (Worked Example) Example) ........... ................ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ....... 99 8.5.2 Set the the View Direction Direction & Scale (Worked Example)......... Example).............. ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ......... ... 101 8.5.3 Set the View View Representatio Representation n (Worked (Worked Example Example)) ........... ................ ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 101
Exercise Exer cise 6
Basic Vie View w & User User-Def -Defined ined Popul Population ation................ ................................ ................................. .............................102 ............102
View Crea Creation: tion: Proj Projecti ection on & Deta Detail il View Views s .............. .............................. ................................ ................................ ...........................104 ...........104 9.1 Projection Projection View ...... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... 104 9.1.1 Quick Projection Projection View............ View.................. ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........ .. 107 9.2 Projection Projection View – A Worked Example Example ......... .............. ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 107 9.3 Detail View ...................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... 110 9.3.1 Polygon Polygon Detail View.............. View.................... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... 113 9.4 Detail View View – A Worked Worked Example Example ...... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... 114
Exercise Exer cise 7
Detail Deta il View Cre Creation........... ation........................... ................................ ................................ ................................. ................................117 ...............117
Sections Secti ons Plane Planes s ................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ..............................118 ..............118 10.1 Overview Overview .............. .................... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... .......... .... 118 10.2 Section Section View View ..... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ......... ... 118 10.3 Automatic Automatic Section Marks – View section section Indicator Indicator ...... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ......... ... 122 10.4 Section Section View View – A Worked Example Example ...... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ..... 124 10.5 Limits-Define Limits-Defined d Section Section View................ View...................... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........ .. 127 10.6 Limits-Define Limits-Defined d Section Section View – A Worked Worked Example Example ...... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ......... ... 128 10.7 Explicit Explicit Section Section Creation Creation...... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........ .. 135 10.7.1 Stepped Section .................................................................... ...................................................................................................................... .................................................. 135 10.7.2 Perpendicular Plane .......................................................................... ................................................................................................................ ...................................... 137 10.7.3 Flat Plane................................................................................................................................. Plane................................................................................................................................. 137 Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 6
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 10.7.4 From View.......................................................................................... View................................................................................................................................ ...................................... 139 10.8 Sections Sections Planes within the Draw Canvas – Display, Display, Creation Creation and Modification..... Modification........... ........... ..... 140 10.9 Stepped Stepped Section Section – A Worked Example Example ...... ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... .......... .... 143 10.10 Section Section Planes Planes within the 3D View – Display, Display, Creation Creation and Modification.. Modification........ ........... ........... ........... ........ ... 148 10.11 Cutting Lists Lists within the the 2D Draw Draw Canvas ..... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... .......... .... 152 10.12 Clipping Clipping & Capping Capping of Section Section Planes Planes within within the 3D View View...... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ......... ... 156
Exercise Exer cise 8
Section Secti on Plan Planes....... es....................... ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ .............................159 .............159
Dimension Dimen sion An Annotatio notation n .............. .............................. ................................ ................................ ................................. ................................. ..................... .....161 161 11.1 Dimension Dimension Element Element ..... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... 161 11.1.1 Dimension Hierarchy ......................................................................... ............................................................................................................... ...................................... 161 11.1.2 Dimension Properties ........................................................................ .............................................................................................................. ...................................... 162 11.1.3 Draw Power Wheel ................................................................ .................................................................................................................. .................................................. 163 11.1.4 Properties Grid.................................................................................... Grid......................................................................................................................... ..................................... 164 Intelligent Text ............................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................................... ............. 165 11.1.6 Vertex Editor .......................................................................... ............................................................................................................................ .................................................. 166 11.1.7 Dimension Visual Style ...................................................................... ............................................................................................................ ...................................... 167 11.1.8 Dimension Grips .................................................................... ...................................................................................................................... .................................................. 168 11.1.9 Dimension Deletion ............................................................................ ................................................................................................................. ..................................... 172 11.1.10 Dimension Tools ................................................................ .................................................................................................................. .................................................. 172 Blanking .................................................................................................................. ............................................................................................................................... ............. 172 11.1.12 Gap ........................................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 173 Explode .................................................................. ................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 175 11.2 Linear Dimensions Dimensions ..... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........ .. 176 11.2.1 Creating Creating Linear Dimensions Dimensions ............ .................. ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........ .. 177 11.2.3 Linear Dimension Modification ...................................................................... ................................................................................................ .......................... 181 11.3 Reference Reference Grid Grid Annotatio Annotations ns ...... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........ .. 183 11.4 Grid Plane View ...... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... 186 11.5 Linear Dimension Dimension – A Worked Example Example ..... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........ .. 187 Angular Dimensions .................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................. ............. 195 Creating Angular Dimensions Dimensions ........................................................................ .................................................................................................. .......................... 196 Angular Dimension Modification .................................................................... .............................................................................................. .......................... 201 Angular Dimension – A Worked Example ................................................................ .............................................................................. .............. 202 11.8 Radial Dimensions Dimensions ..... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........ .. 210 11.8.1 Creating a Radial Dimension.......................................................................... Dimension ................................................................................................... ......................... 211 11.9 Pitch Circle Dimensions Dimensions ...... ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ..... 213 11.9.1 Creating Creating a Pitch Circle Dimension........ Dimension.............. ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... .......... .... 214 11.10 Dimension Dimension Reference Reference Check Check – A Worked Worked Example.......... Example............... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ......... ... 216
Exercise Exer cise 9 Exercise Exer cise 10
Creating Crea ting Linea Linearr Dime Dimension nsions............................ s............................................ ................................ ................................ .................. ..219 219 Creating Crea ting Radia Radiall & An Angular gular Dime Dimension nsions........................ s........................................ ...............................222 ...............222
Label An Annotati notation.................. on.................................. ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ...........................223 ...........223 12.1
Label Element Element ...... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ......... ... 223 Label Hierarchy............................................................................................................ Hierarchy........................................................................................................................ ............ 223 Label Properties.......................................................................................................... Properties....................................................................................................................... ............. 224 Label Visual Style .................................................................. .................................................................................................................... .................................................. 224 12.2 Label Creation Creation ....... ............ ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ..... 225 12.3 Label Tools: Tools: Format Format tab tab ........ .............. ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... 229 12.3.1 Visual Style ................................................................ .............................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 230 12.3.2 Text ............................................................................ .......................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 230 12.3.4 Leader.......................................................................................................................... Leader...................................................................................................................................... ............ 230 12.3.5 Frame ........................................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 230 12.3.6 Gaps .......................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 230 12.4 Label Modification...... Modification............ ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... .......... .... 231 12.4.1 Properties Grid & Labels .................................................................... ......................................................................................................... ..................................... 231 12.4.2 Label Grips ................................................................ .............................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 233 12.5 General General Template Template Labels – A Worked Example.......... Example................ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........ .. 236 12.6 (Symbolic) (Symbolic) Template Template Labels – A Worked Example.......... Example............... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........ .. 239 12.7 Automatic Automatic Tagging...... Tagging............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........ .. 244 12.7.1 Labels & Hierarchy ................................................................ .................................................................................................................. .................................................. 244 Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 7
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 12.7.2 Creating Tags ........................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... .................................................. 244 12.7.3 Library Tagging..................................................................... Tagging ....................................................................................................................... .................................................. 246 12.7.4 Local Tagging ........................................................................ .......................................................................................................................... .................................................. 248 12.8 Autotagging Autotagging (Local Tagging) – A Worked Example Example ...... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... 250 12.9 Label Placement Placement ...... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ......... ... 253 12.9.1 Intelligent Intelligent Label Placement Form: Select............ Select................. ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 254 12.9.2 Intelligent Intelligent Label Placement Form: Position ........... ................ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ..... 254 12.10 Remote Label Placement.......................................................................................................... 254 12.10.2 12.10.2 Label Placement Placement – A Worked Worked Example Example ........... ................ ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... .......... .... 255 12.11 Label Reference Reference Check Check – A Worked Worked Example......... Example............... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 258
Exercise Exer cise 11
Labell Ann Labe Annotatio otation................ n................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ .............................259 .............259
Exercise Exer cise 12
Automatic Auto matic Taggi Tagging ng Ann Annotatio otation n ............... ............................... ................................ ................................ .......................261 .......261
Drawing Draw ing Repr Represen esentatio tation n .............. .............................. ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................... ...263 263 13.1 View Representatio Representation n Style ..... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ..... 263 13.2 Local Representatio Representation n Rules............ Rules.................. ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ..... 263 13.2.1 Local Rules form – A Worked Example.............. Example.................... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... .......... .... 264 13.3 Quick Representation Representation Rules – A Worked Example Example ...... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ......... ... 266 13.4 Hatching Hatching Representation Representation Style................ Style..................... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........ .. 269 13.4.1 Fill Styles .................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ............................................................... 269 Adding Hatching to a View View – A Worked Example ................................................................ .................................................................. .. 270 13.6 Local Hatching Hatching Rules....... Rules............ ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........ .. 271 13.7 Local Rules Form – A Worked Example Example ..... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ......... ... 272 13.8 Quick Hatching Hatching Rules – A Worked Worked Example Example ...... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 276
Exercise Exer cise 13
Drawing Dra wing Repr Represen esentatio tation n ............... ............................... ................................ ................................ ................................ .................. ..279 279
2D Draw Drawing ing ................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ...................... ......281 281 14.1
Region Element Element ...... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... 281 Region Creation.................................................................... Creation ....................................................................................................................... ................................................... 281 Properties Grid & Visual Style ........................................................................ ................................................................................................. ......................... 282 Region Manipulation - Grips.......................................................................... Grips .................................................................................................... .......................... 283 Region Interaction - Draw Power Wheel .................................................................... ................................................................................. ............. 284 14.2 Draw tab ...... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........ 284 14.2.1 Measure .................................................................... ................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... 284 14.2.2 Draw .......................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ .............................................................. 285 14.2.3 Construct .................................................................. ................................................................................................................................. ............................................................... 285 14.2.4 Modify ........................................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 286 14.3 Regions & 2D 2D Drawing – A Worked Example.......... Example................ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ......... ... 287 Exercise Exercise 14 Regions Regions & 2D Drawing............. Drawing................... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ..... 302
Revision Rev ision Manag Manageme ement nt .............. .............................. ................................ ................................ ................................. ................................. ..................... .....305 305 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4
Revision Revision Control...... Control........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ......... ... 305 Revision Revision Compare Compare & Highlighting Highlighting ..... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... .......... .... 306 Display Revision. Revision....... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........ .. 308 Revision Revision Manageme Management nt – A Worked Example Example ...... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... .......... .... 309
Finishing Finish ing the Dra Drawing.......... wing.......................... ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ...........................315 ...........315 16.1
Text ..... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........ 315 Text Visual Visual Style...................................................................................................................... 315 16.2 Text – A Worked Example Example ..... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........ .. 316 16.3 Images................ Images...................... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........ .. 317 16.3.1 Images – A W orked Example ........... ................. ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........ .. 318 16.4 Symbols Symbols ........ .............. ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... 319 16.5 Table & Excel Import.......... Import............... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... 320 16.5.1 Excel Import – A W orked Example........... Example................ ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........ 321 16.6 Overlays Overlays ...... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........ 323 16.7 Overlays Overlays – A Worked Example Example ...... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 323 16.8 Power Selector Selector ....... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ......... ... 325 16.9 Power Selector– Selector– A Worked Example Example ....... ............ ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ....... .. 330
Exercise Exer cise 15
Finishing Finish ing the Train Training ing Dra Drawings............. wings............................. ................................ ................................ .......................335 .......335
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 8
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Drawing Draw ing Expor Exportt .............. .............................. ................................. ................................. ................................ ................................ ................................339 ................339 17.1 Project Project Menu.............. Menu.................... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ......... ... 339 17.2 Export to PDF................................................................................................................................... PDF................................................................................................................................... 340 17.3 Export to DGN .................................................................. .................................................................................................................................. ................................................................ 342 17.4 Export to DXF or DWG .......................................................................................... .................................................................................................................... .......................... 343 17.5 Export to Plot File .......................................................................... ............................................................................................................................ .................................................. 344 17.6 Export to PNG/JPEG/TIFF/BMP/GIF............................................................................................... 345 17.7 Export to SVG/AVEVA.NET............................................................................................................. SVG/AVEVA.NET............................................................................................................. 346
Exercise Exer cise 16
Export Expo rt .............. .............................. ................................ ................................ ................................. ................................. ...............................348 ...............348
Printing Print ing & Plot Sty Styles........... les........................... ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ...........................349 ...........349 18.1
18.2
Project Project Menu.............. Menu.................... ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ......... ... 349 Printer ........................................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 350 Settings ...................................................................... .................................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 350 Exercise Exercise 17 P Print rint & Plot Plot Styles ...... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........ 352
Appendix Appe ndix A – Draw Optio Options............ ns............................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ................................ .........................353 .........353 A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4
Animation & Colours Settings ............................................................................ ...................................................................................................... .......................... 354 Draw Configuration.......................................................................................................... Configuration....................................................................................................................... ............. 355 Selection Selection & Snap Settings ...... ............ ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ..... 356 Object Visibility Settings.............................................................................................................. 357
Appendix Appe ndix B – Dra Draw w Key Keyboard board Comm Commands ands................ ................................ ................................ ................................ ..............................359 ..............359 Appendix Appe ndix C – Dra Draw w Can Canvas vas Comm Commands ands ................ ................................ ................................ ................................. .................................361 ................361 C.1
Direct Direct Canvas Commands ...... ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............ ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ..... 361
Appendix D – Intelligent Text & Alternative Characters.........................................................365 Appendix Appe ndix E – 2D Dra Drawing wing Tec Technique hniques........................... s........................................... ................................ ................................. .........................369 ........369
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 9
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
This page is intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 10
CHAPTER 1 Introduction AVEVA Everything3D™ (AVEVA E3D™) allows designers to utilise an array of applications contained within the program m odules. odules. This training training guide provides discipline discipline specific training for the Draw module. Draw is the AVEVA Everything3D Everything3D drawing production production module where drawings are populated populated with information information taken directly from the Design or Drawing Databases. The associated intelligence with the Design database ensures the drawing accurately reflects the intended design and updates automatically to reflect any changes to the model.
Aim The aim of the training guide is to provide designers with the knowledge and skills necessary to create, dimension and annotate detailed engineering drawings from existing Model data using AVEVA E3D Draw functions and tools.
1.2
Objectives
In general terms, the course objectives are to provide participants with the following:
Familiarisati Familiarisation on of the AVEVA E3D E3D Draw User User Interface. Interface. An understan understandin ding g of the Draw hierarc hierarchy hy and default defaults s to allow the creation creation of new Drawing Drawing Sheets. The ability to to create and define define Views within within a Drawing Sheet, using using 2D and 3D methods; and and to understand how Views may be manipulated and modified. The ability to modify modify Views using Section Section Planes including including Flat, Perpendicul Perpendicular ar and Stepped. The knowledge knowledge to be able to create and modify modify drawing annotation annotation such such as Labels, Dimension Dimensions s and 2D Draw elements.
The knowledge knowledge to employ employ Auto-tagging Auto-tagging within within a Drawing. Drawing.
An understanding understanding to to create and and use Representati Representation on Rules. Rules.
The ability ability to manage a drawing drawing through the use use of Revision Revision Control. Control.
An understanding understanding as as to how a Drawing Drawing may be exported exported and and printed. printed.
provides a detailed training outline, together with the outputs Chapter 2 Draw Overview & Workflow provides expected of participants.
1.3
Prerequis isit ite es
It is expected that trainees will have completed the TM-1801 AVEVA Everything3D™ Foundations training course. Trainees who can demonstrate a suitable understanding of other AVEVA E3D applications and techniques may also be permitted to undertake the training.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
1.4
Cou ourrse Str truc uctu ture re
Training Training will consist of oral and visual visual presentation presentations, s, demonstrations, demonstrations, worked examples and set exercises. exercises. Each workstation will have a training project populated with model objects. This will be used by the trainees to practice their methods and complete the set exercises.
1.5
Usin ing g this Guid ide e
Certain Certain text styles are used to indicate indicate special situations situations throughout this document. Button clicks are indicated by bold turquoi turquoise se text. Information the user has to enter will be bold red text. Additional information notes and references to other documentation will be indicated in the styles below.
Additional information documentation Refer to other documentation System prompts will be bold, italic and in inverted commas i.e. 'Choose function' . Example files or inputs will be in the
1.6 1. 6
courier courier new font.
Ente En teri ring ng a Dr Dra aw Ses essi sion on
To open AVEVA Everything3D and login to the Draw module, the trainee must select the following shortcut or as directed by the Trainer.
Or AVEVA AVEVA Everything3D 2.1.0 from the Windows Start Menu.
The Login form is displayed.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 12
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
From the Login form select the Training Project (TRA) by selecting the Project tile TRA Trainin Training g.
Enter the following login credentials.
User:
A.DRAWMAN
Password:
A
MDB:
A-EQUIPMENT
indicative of typical entry to AVEVA E3D projects. Alternative Alternative login details details may be The details above are indicative supplied suppli ed by the Trainer Trainer..
Click the Draw module tile.
On loading AVEVA E3D Draw, the following default screen layout is displayed.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 13
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
1.7 1. 7
Sett Se ttin ing g up th the e Tr Trai aini ning ng Co Cour urse se
In order to complete the exercises and worked examples in the training guide it is necessary to configure the training environment. Navigate to the Tools tab and click the Setup button located in the Training group. The Training Setup form will be displayed.
Training Naviga Navigate te to the Draw tab and and selec selectt the the Setup Training Course checkbox followed by the Apply button. Close the Training Setup form by clicking the Close button.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 14
CHAPTER 2 Draw Overview & Workflow The following chapter describes the Draw workflow in general terms, together with expected training outputs i.e. an annotated annotated and dimensioned dimensioned drawing. Beginni Beginning ng with an introdu introducti ction on to the Draw interfa interface ce and basic basic manipul manipulati ation on of the compone components nts,, the proceed proceeding ing chapte chapters rs will will follow follow the workflo workflow w introdu introduced ced here here and allow allow the trainee trainee to gain gain an underst understand anding ing of the application application to produce produce a drawing output.
Overview Draw has been designed to allow the user to generate and retrieve industry standard engineering drawings efficiently. efficiently. This has been achieved through an intuitive intuitive user interface interface and the following features.
The drawing drawing can be be formed by multiple multiple views of differing orientation and scope with content directly derived from the 3D model. In addition, the representation of the drawing graphics may be controlled by representation rules that are pre-defined by the project administrator.
View clarity clarity is is aided by various various levels levels of view view types and through the use of view view sections.
The scale of the drawing can be selected from a set of Metric, Architectural and Engineering values.
A label can be attached to any model element and used to display information from the identified element. In turn, the format, content and appearance of the labels are controlled by the designer or through a predefined Visual Style. Direct reference to the design data, combined with a simple update operation, operation, ensures that the annotation always reflects reflects the current current state of the 3D model. The abili ability ty to employ employ Autotagging is an efficient solution for automatically generating labels to a defined defined tagging rule. The rule determines labelled design items and label representation. representation. A dimension is calculated directly from the 3D model. As with label annotation, format, content and appearance are controlled by the designer or through a predefined Visual Style. Direct reference to the design data, combined combined with a simple update operation, operation, ensures that the annotation always reflects reflects the current state of the 3D model. defined, scaled scaled drawing drawing Region Regions s allow allow the designe designerr to generat generate e accura accurate te 2D 2D drawing drawing and defined, annotation and drawings within the Sheet.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
15
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
2.2
Drawing Drawing management management is is achieved achieved through through revision and an d status control, and is further aided by tools such as annotation reference checking.
Draw Workflow E3D Draw User Interface & Database Hierarchy Hierarchy
As found with other ot her areas of AVEVA E3D, Draw has an underpinning hierarchy– this is shown by the hierarchical tree below.
WORLD DEPARTMENT REGISTRY DRAWING
Through the concept of Current Owner (CO) AVEVA E3D Draw has the intelligence to interpret the user action in the Draw Canvas and automatically place the element within the Draw database database hierarchy. This avoids the need for the user to open or continually refer to the Draw Explorer .
SHEET
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on the Draw User Interface.
Sheet Creation
The user is able to create a drawing Sheet using an Explicit or From Template method.
From Template - Using standard standard pre-defined pre-defined templates templates and hierarchy, and with the onus being on the resultant Sheet rather than the forming of the administrative elements, the From Template process is envisaged to be the preferred method for Sheet creation by a Draw user .
A created sheet:
A V E V A E 3 D D R A W W o r k f l o w
Refer to Chapter 5 for detailed information on Hierarchy and Sheet creation.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 16
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Define and Populate Populate a View View
A View determines the model elements to be illustrated within the Sheet and is broadly formed through the definition of the following:
Viewing Viewing parameters, parameters, for example example View direction direction and scale. scale.
Size, position position and and orientation orientation of the View View on the Sheet. Sheet.
Contents Contents of the View – defined defined by a Drawlist. Drawlist.
The contents of the View can be defined through the method of creation e.g. a View may be created and populated via the 3D View or created from an existing View as found with Detail and Projection Views.
A V E V A E 3 D D R A W W o r k f l o w
Refer to Chapters 6 to 8 for detailed information on View creation and population.
Apply a S Section ection Plane
Draw provides the capability to construct sections through specified design items, the results of which can be displayed at View level. Sections aid the clarity of the drawing and can be created during View creation (Section View) or explicitly at any point.
There are three types of section planes.
Flat Plane
Perpendicular Plane
Stepped Plane
Refer to Chapters 9 for detailed information on the creation of section planes.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 17
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Dimension Dimension & Label Label the the Drawing Drawing
The user is able to create Linear/Angular Dimensions and Labels through graphical interaction interaction with the View.
Intelligent Text, where notation is automatically derived from the database, can be used. This is highli highlight ghted ed by the annota annotated ted dimensi dimension on Project Projection ion Lines Lines below; below; centre centre line line notation and equipment names have been applied via a reference to the model element.
A V E V A E 3 D D R A W W o r k f l o w
Chapterr 11 for detail detailed ed information on Dimensi Dimension on annotation. Refer to Chapte
Refer to Chapter 12 for detailed information on Label annotation.
Drawing Representation
The Draw interface allows the control of the View representation in the Draw Canvas through the definition of the View Type, Representation Style and Hatching Style.
Representation and Hatching rules are used to control the representation of Model element types and indicate any s ections ections that may be applied.
Chapterr 13 for detail detailed ed information on drawing representation representation.. Refer to Chapte
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 18
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Region & 2D Drawing
Through the use of a scaled area of the drawing ( Region) and 2D drawing tools, Draw facilitates facilitates the incorporation incorporation of a bespoke bespoke drawing into the sheet.
Refer to Chapter 14 for detailed information on Regions and 2D drawing.
Revision Revision Control Control & Change Highligh Highlighting ting
Draw facilitates the management of drawing versions by a Revision Control utility. The utility allows the user to define Revisions and highlight any changes in the drawing by a comparing two versions.
A V E V A E 3 D D R A W W o r k f l o w
Chapters rs 15 for detailed information on drawin drawing g represe representatio ntation. n. Refer to Chapte
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 19
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Produced Drawings
The Training will produce two drawings:
EQUIPMENT DRAWING - C1101 D R A W I N G O U T P U T
BUILDING BUILDING B02 - HANDRAIL HANDRAIL & LADDER LADDER DETAIL DETAIL D R A W I N G O U T P U T
Refer to Chapter 16 for information on the finished drawings.
P R I N O T U & T P E U X T P O R T
Print & Export
Draw can be utilised to print and export to various formats.
Refer to Chapters 17 & 18 for information on the export and printing of Drawings. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 20
CHAPTER 3 Draw User Interface The Draw module allows a designer to generate fully annotated engineering drawings directly from design data formed in the Model module. There are a number of facilities in the Draw application that may be used to create and modify drawings; aided by a user interface and concepts unique to Draw. The sections that follow consider the Draw User Interface and key concepts in greater detail.
User Interface Overview The Draw application is formed by the following interface components.
Microsoft® Office Fluent™-based User Interface The interface presents Draw functions and utilities via a series of general and context specific tabs.
Draw Canvas The principal window in the application, this area is used to view, create and modify Drawing Sheets. The canvas may be tabbed to aid the navigation of multiple drawings.
Status Bar At the base of the application window, this area displays the current position and scale in the Draw Canvas with respect to the current owner and is used for the toggling of Draw Canvas settings such as Object Snap and Grid visibility.
Active Properties & Properties Grid Represent two grids used to set, view and modify the common properties of Draw elements.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
21
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
3.2
Project Menu & Tabs
Draw utilises a Microsoft® Office Fluent™-based user interface interface with a series of tabs displayed at the top of the application window. When the module is opened, the Home tab is initially displayed.
General tabs group similar tasks such as annotation and update functions together for intuitive selection by the user. Context tabs are specific to the function being used, such as labelling or view modification, and are presented on instigating the command then dismissed on completion of the task. General Tabs:
Format 2D Tab / Format 3D Tab:
contents may be hidden by clicking clicking the tab title or by selecting the Minimize the Ribbon option from Tab contents the prompted right-click menu in the tab. Within the presented presented tabs, key functions functions are held in Groups. Seen here with View as the relevant Group.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 22
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
3.2 .2.1 .1
Project Menu
The Project menu or ‘backstage area’ provides access to a number of key commands commands and facilities facilities including the common AVEVA E3D commands commands Save Work, Get Work, Help, Modules and Exit.
With the exception of Modules, the Project menu commands may be selected via buttons in the Quick Access Toolbar / / Tab menu bar .
Use Users rs may add functions functions to the Quick Access Access Toolbar Toolbar by right clicking on a button and selecting the Add to Quick menu option. The added button persists A cc es s Too Toolbar lbar menu between sessions.
Draw specific Project menu options are described in the following sections.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 23
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
1. New The New menu option is used to initiate a workflow to create a new Drawing Type from a Template, for example a Drawing or a Sheet.
The New area of the Project menu may also be accessed by clicking the New button within the Project group of the Home tab.
2. Op Ope en
The Open menu button allows the opening of Draw elements and Sheets through navigation of the Draw Hierarchy using a prompted Open browser window.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 24
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
3. Ho Home me Ta Tab b
In addition to the Project menu options of creating, opening and closing Drawings, the Home tab allows the user to utilise a selection of functionality via accelerator groups to quickly create Views, annotation and draw elements. Drawing creation is aided by the Home tab allowing the following actions:
Creation Creation of a new Drawing Drawing Type, View View or Region. Region.
Opening Opening and Closin Closing g of Drawing Drawing Sheets.
Undertaking Undertaking of common common editing, editing, drawing and annotation annotation actions actions..
Prompti Prompting ng and manageme management nt of Proper Propertie ties s Grid Grids, s, Plot Plot Styl Styles, es, and Represe Representa ntatio tion n & Hatc Hatch h Rules. Rules.
Update the Current Current Owner. Owner.
3.2.2
Draw Tab
The Draw tab contains functionality pertaining to the creation, measurement and modification of 2D drawing elements. Drawing creation is aided by the Draw tab allowing the following actions:
Measurement Measurement of Draw Draw elements. elements.
Drawing Drawing of various 2D primitiv primitives es and construction construction lines. lines.
Modification Modification of of a 2D drawing drawing by selection selection of Draw tools.
tab. Refer to Chapter 14 Regions & 2D Drawing for further information on the use of the Draw tab.
3.2 .2.3 .3
Annotate Tab
The Annotate tab contains functionality pertaining to the creation, specification, modification and checking of Sheet annotation. Drawing creation is aided by the Annotate tab allowing allowing the following following actions:
Insertion Insertion of objects objects such such as Images Images and Symbols.
Input of Text annotation annotation to a specified specified Visual Visual Style. Style.
Label annotation annotation of Draw elements elements to a specified specified Visual Visual Style. Style.
Dimensioning Dimensioning of Draw Draw elements elements to a specified specified Visual Visual Style. Style.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 25
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Model Referenc Reference e Check of of created created annotation. annotation.
hapte terr 12 L ab abel el Annotation Annotation & C hap hapte terr 11 D imensi on A nnota nnotation tion for further information on Refer to C hap the use of the Annotate tab.
3.2.4
Update Tab
The Update tab contains groups that allow the explicit update of Draw elements such as the Sheet or Backing Sheet. Drawing creation is aided by the Update tab allowing the following actions:
Update of of general Draw Draw elements elements such as Backing Backing Sheet Sheet and Names. Names.
Update of drawing drawing elements elements such as design design graphics graphics and Annotation. Annotation.
Update of tagging tagging annotation. annotation.
3.2.5
Tools Tab
The Tools tab contains contains various utilities utilities that aid Drawing creation and management. management. Drawing creation is aided by the Tools tab allowing the following actions:
Display Display of secondary secondary Draw windows windows and and Explorers. Explorers.
Creation of Draw hierarchy elements.
Searching Searching of Draw elements elements and and formation formation of collections collections..
Import of of Excel and CAD CAD Drawing Drawing files. files.
Creation of Reports.
Control of Draw Defaults Defaults,, for example User Default Default location, location, Units and 3D View representatio representation. n.
evision ision group. Refer to Chapter 15 Revision Management for for further information on the use of the R ev
3.2.6
Manage Tab
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 26
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 The Manage tab contains functionality for the management of the Draw project and drawing. Drawing creation is aided by the Manage tab allowing the following actions:
Control and management management of Database Database elements including including Extracts, Listings, Listings, Claimlists, Claimlists, and access.
Status Control management.
Draw hierarchy organisation.
Revision management and change highlighting.
Refer to Chapter 5 Draw Hierarchy & Sheet Creation for information on the use of the Tools tab. Refer to TM-1803 AVEVA Everything3D
™
Reporting for further information on the use of the Report
group. Refe ferr to TMTM-18 1801 01 AVE VA E ve veryth rything ing 3D Re and C C oll ollections ections group.
3.2 .2.7 .7
™
furthe therr informa informatio tion n on the use of the S ea Foundations for fur earch rch
Vie iew: w: Fo Forrmat 2D Tab
The View: Format 2D tab is a context specific tab prompted on selection of a View in the Draw Canvas. The tab is utilised for the population and modification of the View. Drawing creation is aided by the View: Format 2D tab allowing allowing the following following actions: actions:
Creati Creation on of supple supplement mentary ary Views Views to the selected selected View, for example example Projecti Projections ons and Detail Detail Views.
Management Management and definiti definition on of the View contents. contents.
Specification Specification and modificatio modification n of the View direction, direction, scale and representation. representation.
for further information on the use of the Refer to Chapter 8 View Creation: Basic View & 2D Format for View: Format 2D tab.
3.2 .2.8 .8
Vie iew: w: Fo Forrmat 3D Tab
The View: Format 3D tab is a context specific tab prompted on selection of the Edit in 3D button from the Modify group of the View: Format 2D tab, or on creating a View in the Draw Canvas using a 3D View. Drawing creation is aided by the View: Format 3D tab allowing allowing the following following actions: actions:
Management Management and definition definition of View contents contents through through use of the 3D View and and Model Explorer. Explorer.
Specification Specification and modificat modification ion of the View scale, scale, direction direction and limits. limits.
Specification Specification and and management management of View Section Section planes. planes.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 27
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 for further information on the use of the Refer to Chapter 7 View Creation: Quick View & 3D Format for View: Format 3D tab.
3.2. 3. 2.9 9
Labe La bell To Tool ols: s: Fo Form rma at Ta Tab b
The Label Tools: Format tab is a context specific tab prompted on the creation or selection of a Label annotation.
Format tab allowing the following actions: Label annotation is aided by the Label Tools: Format
Definition Definition of the label label Visual Visual Style. Style.
Modification Modification of the Label Label text representatio representation. n.
Modification Modification of the Label Label Leader Line Line and Frame representati representation. on.
Application Application of annotation annotation tools tools such as Blanking Blanking and Gap insertion. insertion.
Refer to Chapter 12 Label Annotation for further information on the use of the Label Tools: Format tab.
3.3
Status Bar
The Draw Status bar (Bottom (Bottom of the display, left & right corners) displays the scale and co-ordinate position at the mouse cursor in the Draw Canvas with respect to the current owner. In addition, the Status bar allows Draw Canvas graphical aids and representations such as Object snap, Automatic the toggle and selection of Draw update design and Grid visibility, which are covered in TM-1801 Foundations guide.
Status tus bar Scale & Posit sition:
Status tus bar opt options:
Status bar graphical aids is indicated by the button being highlighted. The application application of Status
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 28
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 The additional additional Draw specific specific Status bar graphical aids comprises the following:
Scale
Displays the scale of the View or Region when defined as the Current Owner.
Position
Display Displays s the current current co-ordina co-ordinates tes of the cursor cursor with regards regards to the Current Owner. At Sheet level 2D sheet co-ordinates co-ordinates will be presented whereas specific coordi ordinat nates es will will be disp display layed ed for a View View or Regi Region on,, including 3D co-ordinates where appropriate.
Lineweight
Used to turn the display of line weights weights on and off in the Draw Canvas.
Automatic Update Design
Enables changes to the drawing content to be automatically applied on setting. setting. If not set, changes must be applied explicitly using using buttons on the Home, Update or View: Format 2D tabs.
Greyout Greyout Mode
Used to highlight highlight the Current Owner in in the Draw Canvas.
ection ion 3.5.1 C urrent Owner Owner for for furth further er information on the use See S ect of Greyout mode.
Draw Canvas Gradient
3.4
An aesthetic option used to turn the Draw Canvas background gradient on and off.
Act ctiv ive e Pr Pro ope perrti ties es
The Active Properties form is used to view and change the default properties that will be applied to new objects when they are created, and to subsequently apply these properties to selected objects if required.
The The form form is disp displa laye yed d by clic clicki king ng the the Active Properties butt Display button on in the the grou group p of the the Home tab.
By default, default, the prompted prompted Active Properties form is docked to the left of the Draw Canvas.
The form allows the setting of the following:
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 29
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Current Owner
Current Layer
Current Current Line Type
Current Colour
Also known as the Visual Layer .
May be defined explicitly or as defined by the Current / Visual Layer .
3.4 .4.1 .1
Current Owner
Current Owner ( Through the concept of Current ( CO) AVEVA E3D™ Draw has the inherent intelligence to interpret the user action in the Draw Canvas and automatically place the element within the Draw database hierarchy. This avoids the need for the user to open or continually refer to the Draw Explorer . A Draw Sheet, View and Region are all classified as being a Current Owners and thereby control where new objects objects are placed in the Draw hierarchy. hierarchy. In addition, addition, the Current Owner controls controls how positions positions and distances distances are interpreted through graphical feedback and the status bar. By default all new entities are created below the first suitable suitable owner in the Draw hierarchy based upon the Current Owner; for example the drawing drawing of a line within a View is automatically automatically placed beneath beneath a LAYE element and View Note. On the occasion an appropriate owner does not exist, the owning element is automatically automatically created.
The required required Current Current Owner may be selected selected via via the Current Owner options options list from the Active Properties form form or inte intell llig igen entl tly y thro throug ugh h modification of selection in the Draw Canvas – achi achiev eved ed by a double double-lef -leftt click click within within the required required View, Region or Sheet.
Owner can also be altered via keyboard keyboard shortcut (Ctrl+0 (Ctrl+0 for Sheet and Ctrl+1 through to The Current Owner Ctrl+9 for Views/Regions).
Draw Power Wheel is An alternative method to define the Current Owner via the Draw Canvas and Draw described in Section 7.5 View Manipulation – A Worked Example. In addition to being referenced in the Active Properties form, the Current Owner is is indicated by the Draw Canvas highlight of the View or Region frame. For example, the Sheet shown contains four Views and View 1 is highlighted as the Current Owner . Any element element created created at this this point point will will be owned owned by View 1 with with the appropria appropriate te hierarc hierarchy hy element elements s created created automatically.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 30
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The highlighting of the Current Owner may be amplified amplified by selecting selecting Greyout mode from the Status bar.
colour of the Current Owner border border highlight may be modified via the Project Menu > Options > The colour area and selection of C Display area C ol olours ours : Cur rent Owner Owner border border (active).
3.4 .4.2 .2
Vis isu ual Layers Draw utilises a system of Visual Layers to group objects in the Sheet to aid the management and editing of a drawing. The Active Properties reflects s the curren currentt Properties form reflect Visual Layer via via the Current Layer , Current Line Type and Current Colour fields. fields.
Acting as a series of overlays to the Drawing content, each Visual Layer may ma y be employed in an organisational capacity capacity to group drawing elements elements by purpose purpose or type i.e. construction construction lines or annotation. In addition, with each Visual Layer having an associated Colour and Line Type, a Visual Layer may be used to define the collective collective properties properties of a series of elements. elements. For example, the following drawing is formed by a base Visual Layer containing the View contents (Visual Layer 0) and two annotation Visual Layers. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 31
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Visual Layers form
Visu Visual al Lay ayer ers s ar are e no nott app ppllie ied d to design graphics.
Visual Layer: Primitives & Notes
Visual Layer: Dimensions & Labels
Visual Layer 0: Sheet Views
In regards to the Draw Hierarchy, Hierarchy, a Sheet (SHEE) owns a Visual Layer Layer Set (VLYSET) which contains contains the individual Visual Layers (VLAYER). Layers should not be confus confused ed with LAYE elemen elements. ts. From the perspective of a Draw User, the Visual Layers LAYE element is owned by a Sheet in the Draw hierarchy and is an administrative element for the storage of Draw annotation. A series of LAYE elements, through naming and setting of purpose, are integral to the Automatic Drawing Production process and the population of the Drawing Sheet.
Visual Layers form; displa Visual Visual Layers Layers are adminis administer tered ed via the Visual displayed yed by clicking the Visual Layers button from the Project group of the Home tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 32
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Each Sheet, by default, contains a Visual Layer 0 . The Visual Layer 0 cannot be renamed or deleted – this ensures a Sheet always has a Visual Layer for population.
Additional Visual Layers may be added by clicking the + ( plus) button and, in turn, the – (minus) button may be used to delete an identified Visual Layer. On creation of a Visual Layer, an appropriate name may be given by double-clicking the created Visual Layer name field and entering the required text.
uall Layers Layers form may be sorted by clicking the required column heading. The Vi s ua
The default Colour and Line Type assigned to elements within a Visual Layer are defined by selection from the respective Colour and Line Type options lists.
The visibility of a Visual Layer in the Draw Canvas is controlled by clicking the O On n / Off toggle butt button on withi within n the On colu column. mn. This This is a usef useful ul drawi drawing ng manag manageme ement nt devic device e where where an unobstructed view is required or where annotations such as revision detail or construction lines are required only for reference. Similarly, a Visual Layer may be defined for Print by clicking the On / Off button button within the Print column.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 33
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 In turn, the defined Visual Layers and set properties are referenced by the Active Properties form.
The Current (Visual) Layer may may be selected via the adjacent options list. From From the the poin pointt of sele select ctio ion, n, crea create ted d Draw Draw element elements s will will be contain contained ed within within the define defined d Visual Visual Layer Layer and inheri inheritt the associ associated ated Layer Layer properties. Where e an element element is copied between between She Sheets ets,, if the owni owning ng Vis Visual ual Layer does not exist within within the Wher destination Sheet it will be created and the colour/linetype inherited from the element. If the owning Layer already exists in the destination Sheet and an element is copied with Linetype/Colour ‘By Layer’, the element eleme nt will adopt the Linetyp Linetype/Colo e/Colour ur of the destina destination tion Layer. The Current Line Type defines the Line Type that is to be applied to the primitive element being created. The field may be set to By Layer ; setting the Current Line T ype to the Line Type associated with the specified specified Current Layer. If an explicit Line Type is defined via the options list, the set Line Type overrides the Current Layer default Line Type setting and is thus applied to the proposed primitive element.
The Current Colour defines the colour that is to be applied to the primitive element being created. The The fiel field d may may be set set to By Lay settin ing g the Layer er ; sett Current Colour to the Colour associated with the specified Current Layer. If a Colour is defined via the options list, the set Colour overrides the Current Layer default Colour settin setting g and is applied applied to the propose proposed d primiti primitive ve element.
3.4 .4.3 .3
For orma matt Pai ain nte ter r
The Format Painter is is accessed by expanding the Active Properties form by clicking the expansion button.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 34
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Format Painter Painter may be utili The Format utilise sed d to set the properties of an element in the Draw Canvas as Current Visual Layer , Line Type or the active Current Colour . With the adjacent checkbox ticked, the properties of an object can be used to set the Active Property by selecting the object in the Draw Canvas and clicking the Pick button.
Format Painter may be utilis The Format utilised ed in in the instan instance ce an existing element is required to be modified to be included in a Visual Layer or or to be consistent with Colour . a Current Line Type or Colour To apply the current Active Properties to an object, the check boxes for those properties to be applied are ticked prior to the elements being selected in the Draw Canvas and the Match button clicked.
3.5
Propertie ies s Grid
The Properties Grid displays element attributes that are commonly altered during the course of drawing production. The Properties Grid is integral to the AVEVA E3D Draw workflow; workflow; allowing allowing the user to modify the properties of a drawing and its contents from a common interface.
If a single object is selected, the object type is displayed in the Selection List field at the top of the form.
Properties Grid update The Properties updates s to display display the properties properties of the selected element.
multiple objects are selected, the Selection List field will initially display All (No. of selected elements) If multiple and the Properties Grid will display properties common to the selected objects. Expanding the Selection List displays an options list detailing the element types currently selected, together with the number of instances. On selecting an element type from the options list, the Properties Grid updates to display the properties for the object type or common properties for multiple instances of the same object type.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 35
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Properties Grid allows the definition and modification of the element(s) by input to the grid. The properties properties of an object object may be amended by direct entry to the grid by left clicking in the cell and typing the required input.
A number of properties in the grid allow the selection of a pre-defined option via an options list e.g. Sheet Sizes defined by administrative System Defaults.
Prior to altering a Draw element property the user should be wary of properties defined By Such prop proper erti ties es are are Style or By Laye Layer r . Such Visual Style or influenced influenced by the respective Visual Visual Layer defined defined for the element. The Default button from the Properties Grid may may be used used to set set the the prop proper erti ties es of the the select selected ed element element to the default default defini definitio tion n i.e. i.e. return properties to By Layer or By Style where appropriate.
uall S tyl tyles es for further information on the use of Visual Styles Refer to Sections 6.3, 11.1.6, & 12.1.3 Vi s ua of the definition of Views, Dimensions, Labels and Text.
TM-1 -1801 801 AV E VA E ve veryth rything ing 3D Refer to TM
3.6
™
Foundations for further information on Properties Grid.
The Draw Canvas
The foll follow owin ing g sect sectio ion n highl highlig ight hts s how the use use and and manip manipul ulati ation on of the Draw aids the the proce process ss of draw drawin ing g Draw Canvas Canvas aids production. Common tools such as Delete, Copy, Paste and Cut can all be accessed via the Tools group of the Home tab. In addition Draw Canvas navigation navigation is aided by the Pan and Zoom commands.
3.6. 3. 6.1 1
Grip Gr ips s & Ob Obje ject ct Sn Snap appi ping ng
AVEVA E3D Draw utilises element grips within the Draw Canvas. Further Further to explicit element modification modification via the Properties Grid, a series of grips on Draw elements allow graphical manipulation and modification. For example, the below illustrates a Square primitive (Created by Draw > Rectangle) and available grips.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 36
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Taking the Stretch Grip as an example the grip allows the element to be resized through mouse selection and movement or direct entry of position to the Contextual Editor .
An active grip grip is highli highlight ghted ed by a change change in grip grip colo colour ur.. On moveme movement nt,, the the user user is provi provide ded d canvas feedback as to the change in View size before confirmation confirmation of the action.
The use of Draw grips will be expanded upon in the proceeding chapters with examples including View, Annotation and 2D Drawing manipulation
3.6 .6.2 .2
Draw Powe werr Whe hee el
A number of Draw operations may be initiated and controlled through the use of the Draw Power Wheel ; accessed by right-clicking within the Draw Canvas. A Draw function is selected from the Draw Power Wheel by a left-click on the required tile – this may prompt a secondary Power Wheel for refined selection. For instance selecting the Annotate tile from the primary Text may be selected. Power Wheel prompts a secondary Power Wheel whereby a function such as Label or Text Alternatively, by clicking and holding the right mouse button, the required tile can be indicated by moving the cursor in the appropriate direction and selection confirmed on release of the mouse button. The direction of selection is aided by an indicating line. On selection of the required option in the primary Power Wheel, the action may be repeated for selection in the secondary Power Wheel.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 37
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Power Wheel Wheel, As an extension to the default Draw Power pressi pressing ng the
key on clicking the right mouse button button prompts prompts an alterna alternativ tive e layout layout with with elevat elevated ed functions functions for example Save Work and Search.
The Draw Power Wheel may also be utilised in context during a Draw action.
On selecting a grip or during a draw task such as annotating a View the user may invoke the Draw Power Power Wheel Wheel via via a right right-cl -clic ick k of the the mouse mouse.. The presented wheel allows the user to confirm or cancel the the acti action on in progr progres ess, s, or to navig navigat ate e the Draw Canvas.
Obje Object ct Snap nap Power ower Whee Wheell – Sheet heet / Regi Region on
Obje Object ct Snap nap Power ower Whe Wheel – Vie View
Draw Power Wheel arrangement may be altered via the Customisation area. The default Draw
For further information on the use of the Object Snapping and the Draw Power Wheel refer to Chapter 12 Label Annotation & Chapter 11 Dimension Annotation. TM-1 -1801 801AV AV E VA E ve veryth rything ing 3D Refer to TM
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
™
Foundations for further information on the Power Wheel.
www.aveva.com 38
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exerci Exe rcise se 1
Draw Dra w Use Userr Int Inter erfac face e
Using Chapter 3 as a guide, complete the following tasks:
Navigate Navigate to and and open open Sheet Sheet DRWG-E3D_TRAINING_PROJECT-001/1
Use the Open button from the Project group of the Home tab. The Sheet resides in Department DEPT-AVEVA-All_AREAS .
Become acquainted acquainted with the Draw User interface; interface; selecting selecting and exploring exploring the various tabs including including the Project Menu.
Explore Explo re the View: Format 2D tab by selecting the central View content.
Familiarise Familiarise yourself yourself with the Draw viewing viewing controls controls to zoom and pan across the the Drawing Sheet – try using the options within the Home > Tools group and the Draw Power Wheel option Zoom Extents. Examine the Sheet and Active Properties form to understand what constitutes a Current Owner Greyout mode) and note how Visual Layers have been employed. (including the use of Greyout Noting Noting how selection selection in in the the Draw Canvas alters the Properties Grid change the Drawing Sheet Title from Training Project to (trainee name) Training Project. Using the Active Properties form and Format Painter add add the North Arrow to Visual Layer 0. Utilise Utilise the Status bar to display the Draw Grid , and toggle the canvas Gradient before turning both off. The training requires that Object Snapping, Automatic Design Update, and Dynamic Hints are all set to on.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 39
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
This page is intentionally left blank
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 40
CHAPTER 4 User Defaults default settings. The defaults are often configured AVEVA E3D Draw makes extensive use of default configured and defined defined b y the Draw Administrator, being applied on entry to the Draw module. The administrative libraries that the default defaults s referen reference, ce, store store Draw Draw entitie entities s such such as project project and company company specifi specific c Symbols Symbols,, Labels Labels,, Backin Backing g Sheets, and Representation Styles. From a Draw user perspective the session defaults may be observed within the User Defaults form.
Setting User Defaults The User Defaults are initially determined by the setting of the System Defaults (an administrativ administrative e task) but may be altered as required for the current session by the user.
Defaults s button To display display the User Defaults form form the User Default button is selected from the Defaults group of the Tools tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
41
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The User Defaults modifie ied d in conj conjunc uncti tion on with with the the Draw Explorer selecti ting ng the the Defaults form may be modif Explorer . On selec appropriate User Default field for modification, the user navigates to the element to be referenced in the Draw Explorer and and clicks the adjacent CE button in the User Defaults form. Defaults are only valid for the current current Draw session session User Defaults
Using the File File User User Defaults form menu, users can load settings that have been pre-defined by the Draw Administrator.
Load Pre-Defined
Used to load the Draw System Defaults. Defaults.
Load Pre-Defined From...
Used to load Draw defaults defaults from from a specified specified system location. location.
Display Load Errors…
Used to display any errors which which may occur if the Default element does not exist in the database.
training course has been configured to use the current True Type System Defaults defined. defined. The training
User Defaults & Draw Interface The defined User Defaults are utilised by the Draw Interface in the prompting of default locations for tasks Symbol annotation. such as selection from the Properties Grid or the selection of a Label or Symbol
For example, selection of the Backing Sheet browse button from the Properties Grid prompts a browser at the default User Defaults Defaults form locat ocatiion as defi defin ned by the the User form i.e. i.e. TT/DRA/MAS/BACKS/MET.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 42
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exerci Exe rcise se 2 Use Userr Default Defaults s Using Chapter 4 as a guide, complete the following tasks:
Using the User Defaults form and Draw Explorer modify modify a Default and note the impact on the user interface i.e. Backing Sheet Browse form from the Properties Grid. Ensure Ensure the defaults defaults are returned returned to the Training Training requireme requirements nts by selecti selecting ng the Load Pre-Defined option from the User Defaults form File menu.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 43
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
This page in intentionally intentionally left blank
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 44
CHAPTER 5 Draw Hierarchy & Sheet Creation The underlying data hierarchy employed by AVEVA E3D Draw allows the logical creation of Drawings and Sheets. The following Sections describe how the user is able to create a Drawing and Sheet from a Template. The chapter will also explore the creation of the Draw administrative hierarchical elements. In all likelihood this task task will will be undertak undertaken en by a Draw Administ Administrat rator or but it is descri described bed here for completen completeness ess and for user comprehension of the Draw hierarchy.
Draw Hierarchy As introduced earlier in the training, before physical drawing elements can be created, a number of administrative data hierarchy elements must be in position. Administrative elements divide the project into structured areas for drawing creation.
L IBY ) are flexible in their hierarchical position and are used for the storage of project or Libraries ( LIBY company specific defaults and Draw elements. The diagram diagram below below illust illustrate rates s the Draw database database hierarc hierarchy hy and the owning owning relati relationsh onship ip between between Draw Draw elements. elements. As with all AVEVA E3D databases, databases, the uppermost element is the World - represented represented symbolically symbolically as /*. The administrative elements Department (DEPT), Registry (REGI) and Drawing (DRWG) can be viewed viewed in the Draw Explorer and and module browsers, but cannot be displayed graphically in the Draw Canvas. The principal elements are the owning Drawing (DRWG) element element and member member Sheets (SHEE). (SHEE). A Drawing can contain one or more Sheet (SHEE) elements and a Sheet is the highest level element that can be displayed in the Draw Canvas. The Sheet is defined by the elements stored below, with Views ( VIEW), Regions (REGION) and annotation forming the Sheet appearance. appearance.
hierarchy has been simplified to give clarity to the basic arrangement. arrangement. The hierarchy
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
45
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
5.2
Draw Dr aw Hie Hierar rarchy chy & She Sheet et Cr Crea eation tion fro from m Tem Templa plate te
A Drawing and Sheet are created from Template, with administrative hierarchy elements created as required from resultant browser made available when necessary. A Template may be a standard Drawing (and Sheet) arrangement where the Draw Administrator has predefined a number of drawing elements such as the Backing Sheet, company notation and the arrangement of Views /Regions.
5.2 .2.1 .1
New Dra rawi wing ng Ty Type pe
The creation process is initiated by navigating to the Project tab and New menu option or by selecting the New button and Drawing Type option from the Project group of the Home tab.
The New project menu area is utilised in the first instance to select a Drawing Type – from a Draw user perspective the principal types here are Drawings and Sheets.
5.2. 5. 2.2 2
Temp Te mpla late te Se Sele lect ctio ion n
On selection of the required Drawing Type, the user is able to select a Template Type appropriate to the proposed Drawing and Sheet to be created i.e. an Equipment Drawing Template.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 46
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 The Template Types options list is populated by Templates that adhere to the User Default definition. The User Defaults Defaults form allows allows the definiti definition on of the Drawing Template Prefix that is used to filter available templates for selection in the Template Types options list.
On selection of the required Template Type, an appropriate Template may be selected from the Templates area. Typically the Templates are distinguishe distinguished d by size. Confirmation of selected template is afforded by a Preview of the selected template, complete with Sheet Size, Sheet Name, Drawing Title and Drawing Name.
5.2 .2.3 .3
Drawi wing ng Cre rea ati tion on On selection of the required template, template, the user clicks the Create button to create the required required Drawing and Sheet.
The Create Drawing browser window is displayed.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 47
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
ection ion 3.3.1.2 Open for further information on the use of a typical browser window. Refer to S ect The Create Drawing browser allows the navigation of the Draw hierarchy to an appropriate Department and Registry Registry for Drawing Drawing creation. creation.
In addition, the user is able to create any required Draw elements via the New button above the browser window’s Draw Explorer . Creation options available via the New button are context sensitive to the current position within the Draw Explorer .
For example, on navigating to a Department in the Draw Explorer , the user is able to select New Registry from the New button options list. On creation of any required Draw element, the element appears in the display area of the form. The element is given an automatic name on creation which may be edited by entry to the Name text box.
As an alternative to the New button, a Draw element may be created by selection from a hierarchy sensitive right-click creation menu in the display area of the browser.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 48
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
On navigation to, or creation of, an appropriate Registry, the Drawing (and Sheet) may be created.
By default the Drawing name is defined by an autoname convention i.e. in the example above the Drawing will be named EXAMPLE-REGI/DR1 EXAMPLE-REGI/DR1 and the owned Sheet EXAMPLE-REGI/DR1/S1 EXAMPLE-REGI/DR1/S1..
Autonam Autonaming ing convention convention is as defined by the System Defaults specifi specified ed by the Draw Admini Administrator. strator. The user may edit the required Drawing name, and consequently any owned Sheet name, by entry to the Name field at the base of the Create Drawing browser.
Clicking the Create button will dismiss the Create Drawing form and display the created Sheet in the Draw Canvas.
Draw Explorer Explorer is updat The Draw updated ed to refl reflec ectt the creat created ed Drawing and Sheet. In the example here, the Template used for the creation of the Drawing Drawing has defined defined a Drawing and Sheet with a Visual Layers. single View and a number of Visual
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 49
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
5.3
Drawi Dr awing ng & She Sheet et Cre Creati ation on fro from m Te Templ mplate ate – A Wor Worked ked Exa Exampl mple e
The following following W orked Example will create a Drawing and Sheet for population throughout throughout the training course. course.
From the Home tab select the New segmented button from the Project group and select Drawing Type from the prompted options list.
The Project menu New area is displayed.
Select the Drawing Type tile Drawing.
Template Type option From From the the Template options s list list select select the template area TT/DRA/PRJ/TMP/TRAINING.
Template TRAINING DRAWING A0 . Select the Template TRAINING Confir Confirm m the select selection ion by observ observing ing the templat template e preview and details within Preview area.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 50
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
On selection of the required template, click the Create button.
The Create Drawing browser window is displayed.
Create Drawing Drawing form Usin Using g the the Create form expl explor orer, er, navig navigate ate to the previ previou ously sly creat created ed Depa Departm rtmen entt DEPTEQUIPMENT-ALL_AREAS.
The selected Department does not contain a suitable Registry for drawing creation. Click the New button and select New Registry from the options list. Name the Registry REGI-EQUIPMENT-ALL_AREAS and press the key. Select the created Registry Registry REGI-EQUIPMENT-ALL_AREAS in the form Draw Explorer or by double leftclicking the element in the browser display area.
The Drawing (and Sheet) may now be created.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 51
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
By default the Drawing name is defined by an autoname convention. Edit the Name field at the bottom of the Create Drawing form by entering DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101. Click the Create button to dismiss the Create Drawing browser and display the created Sheet in the Draw Canvas.
The Draw Explorer is updated to reflect the created Drawing and Sheet.
EQUIPMENT NT DRA DRAWIN WING G – Alter the Sheet title to EQUIPME C1101 via the main Properties Grid. Update Update the Backin Backing g Sheet Sheet by clickin clicking g the Backing Sheet button from the General group of the Update tab.
Note that the Backing Sheet is automatically populated. Save Work.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 52
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
5.4
Sheet Creatio ion n
If required, an individual Sheet may be created by the following methods.
From Template
Creation Creation of a Sheet based upon a pre-defined pre-defined Sheet size.
Quick Sheet
Creation Creation of a Sheet based upon the properties properties of the owning Drawing. Drawing.
5.4 .4.1 .1
From Templa latte
The Sheet Sheet creatio creation n proces process s is initia initiated ted by navigat navigating ing to the Project tab New menu menu opti option on or by sele select ctin ing g the the New segmented button and Drawing Type option from the Project group of the Home tab.
Sheet Drawing Drawing Type and then to select The New project menu area is utilised in the first instance to select a Sheet the required Sheet size.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 53
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
On selection of the required Sheet template, the Create button is clicked.
The Create Sheet browser window is displayed.
At this point the Create Sheet form is used to navigate the Draw hierarchy hierarchy to an appropriate appropriate Drawing element for Sheet creation. creation. The user may edit the required Sheet name by entry to the Name field at the base of the Create Sheet browser. Clicking the Create button will dismiss the Create Drawing browser and display the created Sheet in the Draw Canvas. The From Template method can be activated via the power wheel, going straight to the Project area. Select Ctrl and Right click to invoke the Power Wheel and select Drawing Type.
5.4.2
Quick Sheet
As implied by the name, nam e, the Quick Sheet method is the most efficient way to create a new Sheet for an existing Drawing.
The Sheet creation process is initiated by selecting the New button and Quick Sheet option from the Project group of the Home tab.
On selection a Sheet is immediately created and inherits the properties of the owning Drawing. The Sheet is automatically automatically displayed displayed in the Draw Canvas.
The Quick Sheet meth method od hig highli hlight ghts s the imp import ortanc ance e of cor correct rectly ly def defini ining ng the attribute attributes s of the owning Drawing. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 54
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exerci Exe rcise se 3
Hierar Hie rarchy chy & Shee Sheett Crea Creatio tion n
Using Chapter 3 as a guide, complete the following tasks:
Below Department Department DEPT-AVEVA-ALL_AREAS and REGI-AVEVA-ALL_AREAS crea create te a new new Drawing (and Sheet) named DRWG-E3D_TRAINING-EX3 using Template Training Drawing A1. For the created Drawing Drawing DRWG-E3D_TRAINING-EX3, create a second Sheet using the Quick Sheet method. Navigate Navigate to the Regi REGI-STRUCTURAL-ALL_AREAS; Create a Drawing & Sheet below REGI-STRUCTURAL-ALL_AREAS, using template method.
Use Training Drawing A0 Template from Template Template Types TT/DRA/PROJ/TMP/TRAINING.
Ensure the title title block for for the Drawing Drawing Sheet Sheet DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B02 is as follows.
Backing Sheet may may be required via the Update tab to display any alterations An Update Annotation or Backing to the Sheet or Drawing properties.
Select Zoom Extents from the Draw Power Wheel and Save Work using the < Ctrl> key and the Draw Power Wheel.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 55
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
This page is intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 56
CHAPTER 6 Views This chapter will introduce the Draw View element; highlighting key element properties and outlining how the View may be created and manipulated. The proceeding chapters will expand on how a View may be created through 2D and 3D format methods.
6.1
View Element
A View determines the model elements to be illustrated within the Sheet and is broadly formed through the definition of the following:
Viewing Viewing parameters, parameters, for example example View direction direction and scale. scale.
Size, position position and and orientation orientation of the View View on the Sheet. Sheet.
Contents Contents of the View.
The contents of the View are defined by a Drawlist ( IDLI element). A Drawlist holds a list of model elements and is independent of the Views i.e. the same Drawlist may be used in multiple Views. A Sheet may contain several Views that refer to the same Drawlist, or several views that refer to different Drawlists.
D LLB ele Drawlists are stored in Drawlist Libraries ( DLLB elemen ment). t). When a Dra Drawing wing is crea created ted,, a Lib Library rary containing a default Drawlist Library is automatically created. A View is considered c onsidered to be b e a Current Owner . This definition definition allows the user, through selection of the View, to annotate and dimension the View without reference to the Draw hierarchy.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
57
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 required. This is determined determined by When a view is selected, the rest of the drawing may be greyed out if required.
reyout ut button selecting the G reyo button from the Draw Status bar .
6.2
Propertie ies s Grid
On sele select ctio ion n of a View View,, as with with all all stan standa dard rd Draw Draw elements, it is possible to modify the properties of the View via the Properties Grid. The Properties Grid offers an efficient and quick user workflo workflow w to alter alter View geometry geometry,, represe representat ntation ion and visibility visibility by selection selection or direct entry.
6.3
Vie iew w Visual Style
Visual Style contain A Visual contains s preset preset represe representa ntatio tion n properti properties es for the Draw elements elements View, View, Text, Text, Label Label and Dimension. Dimension. An element adopts a Visual Style either through definition definition on creation or by modification. modification. The View Visual Style principally defines the representation of the frame and, if applicable, the View matchlines. The use of a Visual Style ensures the consistency of View creation within the Sheet and across a series of Drawings. The properties of the Visual Style are determined by the Draw Administrator and any further alterations to the View Visual Style are reflected in each instance the style has been referenced.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 58
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
TM-187 1870 0 AVE VA E veryt verything3D hing3D Refer to TM-
™
Draw A dm dminis inis tra tration tion for further information on the definition
of a View Visual Style. The View Visual Style may be specified prior to View creation by setting the style within the Active Visual Styles group of the Annotate tab.
Visual al Styl Style e ma Alternatively, the Visu m ay be retrosp retrospect ective ively ly modifie modified d via the Properties Grid. Note that the View properties controlled by the Visual Style are set to By Style to ensure the Visual Style is adopted. adopted.
Where e a Vie View w prop property erty has bee been n exp explic licitl itly y alte altered red from the defi defined ned Visual Style ( By B y Style ), the Wher Dime Di mens nsio ion n ma may y be re rese sett to ad adopt opt th the e Vi Visu sual al St Styl yle e by clicki clicking ng th the e S et to Default button on on th the e Properties Defaultss butt Grid .
6.4 6. 4
Vie Vi ew Ma Mani nipu pula lati tion on - Gr Grip ips s
In addition to direct entry to the Properties Grid, a View may be manipulated graphically by the use of View Grips.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 59
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
A View may be manipulated and modified through the following View Grips:
Stretch Grip Four grips allow the View to be resized through mouse selection and movement or direct entry to the Contextual Editor .
An active grip is highlighted by a change in grip colour and the User is provided visual feedback as to the change in View size before confirmation of the action.
Position Grip A single grip at the centre of the View allows the View to be repositioned through mouse selection and movement or direct entry to the Contextual Editor .
An active grip is highlighted by a change in grip colour and the user is provided visual feedback as to the change in View position before confirmation of the action
The relative positioing positioing of Views i.e. aligning aligning more than one View, may be accomplished accomplished through the Position grip and the locking (< S pace> key) of one drection in the Contextual Editor . Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 60
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Scale Grip
Four grips at the centre centre of each View side allow the User to rescale the View to a default scale through mouse selection.
An active grip is highlighted by a change in grip colour and the User is provided visual feedback as to the change in View scales before confirmation of the action.
6.5 6. 5
View Vi ew In Inte tera ract ction ion - Dr Draw aw Po Powe werr Wh Whee eell
A View may be altered and manipulated through the use of the Draw Power Wheel and may be used in conjunction with the View Grips to specify an action or Object Snap point. On selecting the View, the user may invoke the Draw Power Wheel via a right-click right-click of the mouse and select actions actions such such as Copy, Paste and Move. On selecting a View grip, the User may invoke the Power Wheel via a right-click of the mouse to confirm or cancel cancel an action or navigate the Draw Canvas. In addition, on selecting a View grip, the User may invoke the Power Wheel via a right-click of the mouse combined with pressing the < Shift> key to rest restri rict ct mouse mouse sele select ctio ion n to a speci specifi fic c object snap point.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 61
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
6.6
Vie iew w Cre reat atio ion n Me Meth tho ods
A View may be created through a variety of methods and from a hierarchical perspective the View is owned by the Sheet; inheriting any attributes defined at the Sheet level as default attributes. automatically on The User must be at Sheet level or below before a View can be created, this is done automatically selecting selec ting a view creation method. An extended list of View creation methods is available from the View group group of the the Home tab. tab. Where Where an exis existi ting ng View is to be used to create a second associated View within the Sheet, the User may also select an appropriate View creation method from the View group from the View: Format 2D tab. The following methods of View creation may be utilised from the View group of the Home tab.
Quick
Quick Quick view view creati creation on allo allows ws the the user user to produce produce a View View direc directly tly from from the the Model Explorer to to a default representation, scale and format.
Refer to Section 7.1 Quick View Creation for further details on Quick View creation creati on and use.
Model
view creat creatio ion n allow allows s the the user user to produ produce ce a View View from from the the Model From From Model Model view Explorer using a 3D view. The View is created to a custom representation, scale and format.
Refer to Section 7.4 View Creation from Model for further details on From Model View creation and use.
Projection
Projection Projection view view creatio creation n allows allows the user to quickly quickly form a projection of a defined orthogonal View.
Refer to Section 9.1 Projection View for for details on Projection View creation. Region
Region view creation creation allows allows the the user to define a scaled area of the Draw Canvas for 2D drawing.
Refer to Chapter 14 Regions & 2D Drafting for details on Region creation and 2D drafting.
Hull
Hull view creation creation (Marine related projects projects only)
Refer to Appendix * (TBC) Draw Marine - For details on Hull View creation.
Detail
Detail view creation creation allows the user to identify identify a View View and select an area to form a Detail View of differing differing scale and representation. representation. for details on Detail View creation and use. Refer to Section 9.2 Detail View for
Section
Sect Sectio ion n view crea creati tion on allow allows s the user user to quic quickly kly form form a proj projec ecti tion on of a defined defined orthogonal view and form a section plane therein.
Refer to Section 10.2 Section View for details on Section View creation and use. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 62
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Basic
Basic view creation creation allows the user to define a simple View for population population at a later stage by any method e.g. the reference of a pre-defined project Drawlist. for details on Basic View creation and use. ection ion 8.1 Basic View for Refer to S ect
Where a Sheet has been created through the selection of a Drawing Template, the Sheet may contain one or more Views as defined by the Draw Administrator. The View(s) are representative of a Basic View and may be modified by the View: Format 2D context tab prompted on View selection.
information on functionality functionality available within within the tab. ection ion 8.2 V iew: F orm orma at 2D for further information Refer to S ect
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 63
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exerci Exe rcise se 4 Vie View w Elemen Elementt Using Chapter 6 as a guide, complete the following tasks:
If not already already open, navigate navigate to to and open open Sheet DRWG-E3D_TRAINING_PROJECT-001/1
Use the Open button from the Project group of the Home tab. The Sheet resides in Department DEPT-AVEVA-All_AREAS .
Become acquainted acquainted with the Draw View Element Element by selecting and exploring exploring the various view grips, grips, Properties Properties Grid properties properties and View context tabs.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 64
CHAPTER 7 View Creation: Quick View & 3D Format The following Chapter will describe the process by which a View may be created from the 3D Model by efficiently efficiently identifying identifying and selecting 3D elements elements to populate the View Drawlist. Drawlist.
7.2
Qui uic ck Vi Vie ew Crea eattio ion n
The Model Explorer can can be used in conjunction conjunction with the 3D View to populate, navigate navigate and interrogate design elements. Quick view creation allows the creation of a View directly from the Model Explorer via via a right-click context menu.
The Quick View creation method may be prompted by clicking the Quick button within the View group of the Home tab.
The workflow, through the limited number of steps, is quick and simple; aided by the application of a default scale, direction and representation format.
7.2. 7. 2.1 1
Quic Qu ick k Vi Vie ew Cr Crea eati tion on – A Wo Work rked ed Ex Exam ampl ple e
Navigate Navigate to previously previously created Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 and ensure the Sheet is the Current Owner ; either by selection in the Active Properties form or by double left-clicking the Sheet in the Draw Canvas.
Navigate to the Home tab and click the Quick button in the View group, this will automatically activate the Model Explorer .
The Model Explorer has has similar functionality as found in the AVEVA E3D Model module – the explorer allows the user to navigate the design database, add elements to the 3D View and query element attributes.
Using the Model Explorer , navigate to the Zone ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01. Using Using the right-c right-clic lick k contex contextt menu, menu, select select the menu option Quick View Creation.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
65
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
In the Draw Canvas the Contextual Editor updates to prompt the user to locate the first corner of the proposed View.
X 610mm, Position the cursor at the explicit position X 610mm 530mm and click the left mouse button.
Y
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to locate the opposite corner of the View. Posi Positi tion on the curs cursor or at the relat relativ ive e posi positi tion on X 410mm, Y 270mm Y 270mm and click the left mouse button. directly into the Context Editor. Editor. Navigation Navigation between fields and locking on The position may be entered directly entry is by key selection. selection. A field may also be locked and unlocked unlocked via < s pace> key selection. The created View, now shown as the Current Owner , is displayed complete with Drawlist contents and portrayed portrayed with a default scale, direction and representatio representation n format. visible e if Automat Automatic ic update design is on, otherwi otherwise se Current Owner Update should The view will only be visibl be selected.
Selecting the created View by clicking on the view frame or view content prompts the View: Format 2D tab. Note that the following default View properties are automatically applied as part of the Quick View method.
The default Representation Styles are set as the first available Representation and and Hatc Hatchi hing ng Rule Rule withi within n the the defin defined ed User Defaults Representation Libraries.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 66
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The View View is orien orientat tated ed Plan Plan North North (or Down Down)) by defau default lt and and to a scal scale e appr appropr opria iate te to the defin defined ed View View size (in this instance 1:75).
With the first View created, navigation between View and Sheet and the definition of the Current Owner may may be demonstrated.
In addition to the previously described methods of Current Owner selection the Draw Power Wheel may be used. Noting the created View is the Current Owner , invoke the Draw clicking ng the the rightright-cl clic ick k butt button on and and sele select ct the the Power Power Wheel Wheel by clicki Navigator tile. tile. The Navigator may may be used to select the Current Owner .
From the Navigator select the Sheet tile DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1.
The Draw Canvas adjusts to the extents of the Sheet and the Sheet becomes the Current Owner .
Perform a Save Work using the < Ctrl> key and the Draw Power Wheel.
7.3
The 3D View
The 3D View window in AVEVA E3D Draw allows the user to assemble, examine and manipulate design elements prior to establishing the view content as a 2D drawing.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 67
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
7.3. 7. 3.1 1
Acc cces essi sing ng th the e 3D Vi View ew - Vi View ew Cr Crea eatio tion n
A View may be created through the population of design elements selected from the Model Explorer . The View contents may be graphically navigated and modified using the embedded 3D View within the Draw Canvas and the associated View: Format 3D tab.
The process to create a View from the Model envi enviro ronm nmen entt is init initia iate ted d by clic clicki king ng the the Design button within the View group of the Home tab.
The workflow begins with the definition of the View size. On clicking the Design button, the Contextual Editor updates to prompt the location of the first corner of of the proposed View. On locating a position in the Draw updates to prompt the specification of the opposite corner . Canvas, the Contextual Editor updates
Alternatively, on the first prompt, the user may click the menu Down Arrow button to display the Contextual Editor menu and the Centre tile option may be selected.
This updates the Contextual Editor to to prompt the user to specify the centre point of the View.
On sele selecti cting ng the the cent centre re poin pointt loca locati tion on,, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to specify the width and height of the View through mouse manipulation or direct position entry to the Contextual Editor positon positon fields. Dynamic feedback is given in the Draw Canvas to indicate the proposed View.
The position position may be entered directly directly into the Contextual Editor . Navigation between fields and locking on entry is by key selection. selection. A field may also be locked and unlocked unlocked via < s pace> key select selection. ion. Whichever method is used to set the dimensions of the view window, the prompt will display Modify view or . If not open, the Model Explorer is is displayed and may be used in conjunction with the embedded 3D View to populate, navigate and interrogate design elements. The User Interface updates to display the context View: Format 3D tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 68
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
7.3. 7. 3.2 2
Acc cces essi sing ng th the e 3D Vi View ew - Vi View ew Mo Modi dific ficat atio ion n
The 3D View may also be utilised to manipulate and modify an existing Sheet View. As with the workflow for View creation by the 3D View, the Model Explorer and functionality functionality within the context View: Format 3D tab Explorer and may be used to alter the contents of the View.
To pro prompt mpt the the embe embedd dde ed 3D 3D View and Format 3D tab, associated associated context context View: Format tab, the user user must must firs firstt sele select ct the the requ requir ired ed View View by selection of the View frame or View content. Sele Select ctio ion n is indi indica cated ted by the the upda updatin ting g of the the a nd View: Format 2D tab, plus Properties Grid and the appearance of the View grips.
To transform the View to the 3D View window the Edit in 3D button is clicked from the Modify group of the View: Format 2D tab.
The identified View transforms to present the 3D View within the Draw Canvas. In turn, the user interface updates to display the context View: tab and the Model View: Format Format 3D tab Explorer is automatically displayed for Drawlist modification.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 69
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
7.4
Vie iew: w: Fo Forrma matt 3D Tab
The View: Format 3D tab is a context tab associated with the 3D View. The View: 3D Format tab allows the user to populate and modify Drawing Sheets through a combination of graphical interaction with the 3D View and presented functionality functionality within the tab.
7.4 .4.1 .1
Manage Group
In combination with the Model Explorer , the Manage group allows the direct management of the View Drawlist through the population of the 3D View content list.
Clicking the View Contents button in the Manage group displays the View Content form. The form displays the contents of the View that will form the Drawlist. An entry can be removed from the View Content list by right-clicking the entry and selecting the Remove Selected option.
Elemen mentt and Remove Remove Ele Elemen mentt butt The Add Ele buttons ons add add and remov remove e element(s) to/from the 3D View and View Content list. The element added or removed is usually the current element, unless there is active multiple selections selections (in which case the entire selection is added or removed). removed).
From the 3D view a selected element can be removed using the power wheel too. Right click within the 3D view area activates the function.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 70
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
As an extension to the Manage group functionality, the View Content list may be populated through the direct selection of an element in the Model Explorer before before dragging and dropping into the 3D View.
In addition, the Model Explorer right-click right-click context context menu allows allows the addition of elements within within the volume of, or by connection to, the Current Element. Conversely, the Model Explorer and 3D view right-click context menus also allow the removal of elements via the Remove menu options. options.
7.4.2
Scale
The Scale group allows the definition of the scale for the created View.
Three types of scale are available from the options list: Metric, Architectural, and Engineering.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 71
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
unit-less scale to the Metric: this option allows the User to apply a numeric unit-less Drawlist e.g. 1/10, 1/100, and 1/500.
Architectural: this is an imperial unit option that expresses scales in terms of inches to the foot and is generally used for buildings and structures. Engineering: this is an imperial unit option that expresses scales in terms of inches to the tens of feet and is generally used for larger scales.
The Scale Scale of of the View is define defined d by direct direct entry entry to the the Scale textbox textbox or by select selection ion of a default scale from the Scale options list. Any change to the Scale is immediately immediately reflected reflected by the View altering altering in size size within within the Draw Canvas.
The use of the Auto scale option is not required for the construction of a view from 3D methods due to the automatic automatic scaling of the view on creation/popu creation/population lation.. In both instances instances the automatic automatic scale is used as a guide in selecting the nearest or most suitable default scale.
Refer to Section 6.3 View Manipulation – Grips on the use of a View grip to graphically alter the scale of the View.
7.4.3
Direction
The Direction group allows the definition and validation (where the View is manipulated by other means) of the View direction and orientation.
The View Orientation segmented button and options list allows the selection of a pre-d pre-defi efined ned dire directi ction on to contr control ol the the orien orienta tati tion on of the the View View and and the the contents. The adjacent input textbox provides visual feedback of orientation and allows the input of non-conventio non-conventional nal directions, for example n23e35d.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 72
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
7.4 .4.4 .4
Defin ine e Limits
The Define Limits group allows the definition of limits defined Views.
Limit defined Views are used to draw the contents of a specified volume of the model. The Limits are defined in project co-ordinates and are represented by the size of the View frame at the selected scale. The Limits from Drawlist button sets the 3D limits of the View to a volume that will enclose all the items in the view drawlist.
The Limits Volume is indicated indicated within within the 3D View by a shaded cube.
The Limit co-ordinates area of the group is activated on clicking the Limits from Drawlist button and is initially populated with the limits of the current drawlist.
The required View limits can be set by defining the orientation and directly entering explicit project co-ordinates into the six co-ordinate textboxes within the Define Limits group.
Alternatively, the required View limits can be defined graphically by manipulation of the Limits volume box, using the appropriate appropriate drag arrow. While the arrow is active the contextual contextual editor can also be used to nominate nominate the limit. The highlighted limits volume box is defined by the extent of the drawlist limits.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 73
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Each side of the Limits volume has a drag arrow that may be utilised to positon the volume edges at the required position.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 74
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 For example, altering the View direction to East, the proposed 2D View is indicated by the limits volume outline.
textt sho showin wing g the co-ordina co-ordinates tes of the View limi limits. ts. See The View frame can include Matchlines with tex S ecti ection on 7.4. 7 Di s play for for further information information on the application application of Match Matchlines. lines. Checking the checkbox adjacent to the limit position will create a section plane. The section is created from the plane of the view limit face defined by the given position.
order der to se see e th the e se sect ctio ion n pl plan ane e th the e di disp spla lay y se sect ctio ion n pl plane anes s bu butto tton n ne need eds s In or to be selected within the section group format 3D tab.
Refer to Chapter 10 Section Planes for further information on the use of the Format 3D tab for Section plane definition. The Clear Limits button removes the 3D limits defined for the View. The View Frame button locks the view limits, removing the grip option to adjust them in 2D format.
7.4.5
Remember
The Remember group may be utilised to Freeze and Restore the 3D View during view population and manipulation.
The Freeze button is used to store the current properties properties of the 3D View e.g. current view direction, direction, scale, rotation and orientation.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 75
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Restore button is used to reinstate reinstate the current view direction, direction, scale, rotation and orientation orientation of the 3D View to those saved when the Freeze button was last used. The Freeze and Restore button buttons s can can be emplo employe yed, d, for for exam exampl ple, e, to furth further er modify modify the the View View conte contents nts subsequent subsequent to defining defining the View limits, position, direction direction and scale.
The View is defined as shown here and the Freeze button is clicked to store the 3D View properties.
The View is manipulated to allow navigation of the View contents and removal of element(s) from the 3D View, via the Power Wheel
The Restore button is clicked to restore the 3D View to the pre-orientated position and scale but minus the elements that have been removed from the View.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 76
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
7.4.6
Clipping
The Clipping group may be utilised to Clip and an d Cap the 3D View during view manipulation. Along with Clip Plane selection.
The Clip button removes elements from the display that are outside of the Limits Volume
The Clip Plane button allows the selection of pre defined planes within the 3D view, which are then used for clipping. The Cap button produces a cap highlight to elements that are sectioned by the Clip function.
7.4.7
Section The Section group group contai contains ns Draw Draw functi functions ons that that influen influence ce the final final depiction of the View in the Draw Canvas.
The Create button allows a section plane to be created, using either free placing or the contextual editor
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 77
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
information n on the use of the Section Planes Planes form. Refer to Chapter 10 Section Planes for further informatio
The Display button will toggle between showing any created section planes in the 3D view.
The Delete button will delete the selected section plane
The Cutting list options drop-down displays the available drawlists to define the objects that are removed from the Vsec view using a pre-defined cutting list. The Direction options modifies the direction of the Vsec view plane. The direction can be defined in East, West, North, South, Up and Down Select Open to define the plane as an open ended shape. For example, an L shape consisting of two planes. By default, a plane is deleted if the existing Vsec view plane is a closed shape. Select Closed to define the plane as a closed shape. For example, a rectangle. By default, a plane is added if the existing Vsec view plane is an open ended shape
Refer to Chapter 10 Section Planes for further information on the use of the Section Planes form. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 78
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
7.4.8
Complete
The Complete group is the final stage of the View creation process from the 3D model.
On definition of View contents and format: Selecting the Apply button performs a Freeze on the current 3D View and creates the 2D View in the Draw Canvas. The View: Format 3D tab is closed. Selecting the Finish button creates the 2D View in the Draw Canvas as displayed when the Freeze action was last performed. However, the action does apply any alterations to the current limits of the View and any changes to the Drawlist. The View: Format 3D tab is closed. Selecting the Cancel button closes the 3D View and View: Format 3D tab without saving saving any changes. At this moment an update design would occur if Automatic Update Design is on. Where Limits have been defined in the 3D View, the 2D Draw Canvas View is resized on creation to reflect the new limits boundary and the scale of the view. If the limits have not been set, the Draw Canvas 2D View is created in alignment with the original sized view. The View is now visible in the Draw Canvas with a default Representation Style and View Style. These properties may be altered via the View: Format 2D tab Representation Styles group
Refer to Section 8.3.5 Representation Styles for further information on the View: Format 2D tab and the setting of View type and Representation styles.
7.5 7. 5
View Vi ew Cr Crea eati tion on fr from om Mo Mode dell – A Wo Work rked ed Ex Exam ampl ple e
Continuing with the Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 a second View will be created to demonstrate the use of the 3D View to populate the Draw View.
Navigate to the Home tab and select the Design button.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the location of the first corner of the View.
Posi Positio tion n the the curs cursor or at the the expli explici citt posi positi tion on:: X 50mm, Y 800mm Y 800mm and click the left mouse button.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the location of the opposite corner.
Posi Positio tion n the curs cursor or at the rela relati tive ve posit positio ion: n: X and clic click k the the left left mouse mouse 500mm, Y - 400mm 400mm and button. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 79
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The iden identi tifi fied ed View View tran transfo sforms rms to pres present ent the the embed embedde ded d 3D View within the Draw and the Contextual View within Draw Canvas Canvas and Editor is is updated to prompt modification to View. In turn, the user interface updates to display the context View: Format 3D tab and the Model Explorer is automatically displayed for Drawlist modification.
co-ordinate feedback feedback in the Status bar alters to reflect the 3D View co-ordinates rather than the Note co-ordinate
Draw Canvas 2D co-ordinates.
The Model Explorer is is automatically prompted for element navigation and drawlist creation.
Navi Naviga gate te to and and sele select ct Zone ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01. Holdin Holding g the left mouse button button drag and drop the element into View within the 3D View within the Draw Canvas.
Alternatively the item may be added to the 3D View by by selecting the 3D View > > A dd option option from the rightclick context context menu from the Mode Modell E xplorer , or through the Ma Manag nag e group functionality within the Vi ew ew:: Format 3D tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 80
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Orientate Orientate the added element element by selecting selecting the orthogonal orthogonal North direction from the Direction button button option option list list within within the Direction group group of the the View: Format 3D tab.
To define the scale for the View, ensure the Scale type is set to Metric and select 1:75 from the Scale options list, Scale group, Format 3D tab.
At this point it is prudent to click the Freeze button within the Remember group. group.
Navigating Navigating to the Define Limits group; select the Limits from Drawlist button.
A Limits Box is created.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 81
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
To observe the effect of the limits box on the view contents, orientate the view to an Iso 3 direction from the Direction button options list within the Direction group.
Using the Limits Box handles to manipulate the limit sides to include only Equipment item EQUI C1101. manipulated from the the Iso 3 orientation to better position the Limits Box if obstructions The View may be manipulated prevent a clear view of EQUI C1101.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 82
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Click the Restore button from the Remember group group to reinstate View to a North orientation at a scale 1:75.
Click the Apply button within the Complete group to confirm the creation of the limits-defined limits-defined View.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 83
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
7.8
View Manipulation – A Worked Example
To demonstrate the use of View grips and to produce the required View, select the created View DRWGFRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1/V2 to prompt the View grips. Select the Scale grip and stretch to the default scale 1:33.1/3.
(Scale detail)
Now the View size will be altered to accommodate the enlarged View contents.
Select the Central Stretch grip. The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification specification of the stretch point. Stretch the View to the relative position X -2.5mm, Y -150.5mm Y -150.5mm by direct entry to the Contextual Editor .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 84
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Navigate to the Properties Grid. Enter the View Title
FRACTIONATING_COLUMN C1101 – NORTH ELEVATION. And set the Frame Visibility to No .
Save Work.
The Sheet and View are now updated as follows:
functionality y within the View: Format 3D tab The two Worked Examples are designed to demonstrate functionalit and the Draw Canvas grips; they do not represent the most efficient way to create the eventual View.
. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 85
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 86
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exerci Exe rcise se 5
View Vie w Cre Creati ation on fro from m Mod Model el
With Sheet DRWG- FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 as the active Sheet and ensuring View DRWGFRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1/V1 is the Current Owner , use the preceding Chapter as a guide to further populate and manipulate the View.
Sele Select ct the View View (by select selectin ing g the the View View frame frame or cont conten ent) t) and from from the the prompted View: Format 2D tab, select the Edit in 3D button.
The following elements are to be added to the View:
ZONE-PIPING-AREA-01.
ZONE-PIPING-AREA03.
ZONE-CIVIL-AREA01.
ZONE-CIVIL-AREA03.
ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA03.
ZONE-ELECTRICAL-AREA03.
ZONE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01.
ZONE-STRUCTURAL-AREA03.
Managg e group. Drawlist contents by selecting selecting the View Contents button from the Mana Check the Drawlist
Set the view direction to Down.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 87
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 Using Limits from the Drawli Drawlist st and the Limits Box, modify the View volume to cut Pipes PIPE 03100-B-33 and PIPE 03100-B-34.
conflict between eventual eventual View frame and content. Alter the Limits to clear the base slab - this will avoid conflict
Set the Scale to 1:100.
Freeze the View and experiment experiment with the navigation navigation controls within the Navigation group.
Restore the View and Finish.
Using the Properties Grid enter the View Title: AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) and set the Frame Visibility to No .
The View should now be as follows:
View Representation Representation Style Style is set to TT/ and the View Style is TT/DR DR A/ A/PR PR J /R E PR W/ W/GE GE N/ N/B B AS IC and Ensure the View
Global. Bo Properttie iess Grid or wi Both th pr prop oper erti ties es ma may y be vi view ewed ed an and d al alte tere red d in th the e Vi View ew Proper withi thin n th the e Representation Style group of the Format 2D tab. Select Zoom Extents from the Draw Power Wheel and Save Work using the Draw Power Wheel and the key.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 88
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
This page is intentionally left blank
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 89
CHAPTER 8 View Creation: Basic View & 2D Format The preceding chapter highlighted the ease in which a View may be created and populated in the Draw Canvas by utilising the 3D View and Model Explorer . The sections that follow will build on the view creation process to highlight how a view may be created using 2D methods and how all views may be further modified in representation.
8.2
Basic Vie iew w Crea eattio ion n
The Basic View View creatio creation n method method allows allows the definition definition of a view(s view(s)) within within the Draw Canvas for future future population. This method may be employed, for instance, during the forming of a Template or where the View contents are to be defined by an existing drawlist.
A Basic View is created by clicking the Basic button within the View group of the Home tab.
The workflow begins with the definition of the View size. On clicking the Basic button, the updates tes to Context Contextual ual Editor Editor upda prompt the User to locate the first corner of the the prop propose osed d View View in the Draw Canvas followed by the opposite corner . Alternatively, the View may be defi define ned d by Centre with with user user defi define ned d widt width h and and heig height ht,, or by utilis utilising ing a predefined view view of predefined size and position. Both options are available via the Contextual Editor menu. menu.
8.3 8. 3
Basi Ba sic c Vi Vie ew – A Wo Work rked ed Ex Exam ampl ple e
Navigate to previously created Sheet DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B02/S1 and ensure the Sheet is the Current Owner .
Navigate to the Home tab and click the Basic button in the View group to instigate view creation.
In the Draw Canvas the Contextual Editor updates to prompt the user to locate the first corner of the proposed View. Position the cursor at the explicit Draw Canvas position X 730mm X 730mm, Y 425mm Y 425mm and click the left mouse button.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
90
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to locate the opposite corner of the View.
X 980mm, Y 780mm Y 780mm and click the left mouse button. Position the cursor at the explicit Draw Canvas position X 980mm
toggles between A bs (Abs (Absolu olute) te) and Relative positioning on pressing the < s hi ft > ontext extua uall E dito ditor r toggles The C ont and <@ > key together. The Contextual Editor is then further refined to a two co-ordinate position by pressing the <@ > key.
The The View View is cre created ated in the the Draw Canvas and is shown as the Current Owner .
Select the View by selection of the View frame or View content. Use the Properties Grid to enter the View Title BUILDING B02 (PLAN NORTH).
Select Zoom Extents from the Draw Power Wheel and Save Work
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 91
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
8.4
Vie iew: w: Fo Forrma matt 2D Tab
The View: Format 2D tab is prompted on selecting a View by selection of the View frame or View content.
8.4.1
View
The View group group contain contains s methods methods for the creatio creation n of associ associate ated d Detail, Projection and Section Views plus the individual creation of View View Sections.
Refer to Chapter 9 View Creation: Projection & Detail Views for further information on the creation and use of these associated Views.
Refer to Chapter 10 Section Planes for further information on the use and creation of Sections.
8.4.2
Modify
The Modify group allows allows the definition definition of the View by 3D and 2D methods plus the application of Matchlines where a View is limits defined.
The Edit in 3D button prompts the View: Format 3D tab and updates the View to display the embedded 3D View.
Refer to Chapter 7 View Creation: Quick View & 3D Format for for further information on the use of the resultant Format 3D tab.
The View Limits button allows the user to define a View from the Set View Limits form. Using Drawlist, Elements or View View option to determine the extents.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 92
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
8.4.3
View Limits
The View Limits button activates the Set View Limits form. This controls the limits of the 2D view via the selection of the Set from function.
To select a view it is important important to select the view frame, once the Set View Limits form is active the view limits can be changed. The view can be changed to suit either the Drawlist or by selecting Elements within the drawing. The View option allows the selection of another view, to match the selected views limits. Section planes can be created from the check button with the corresponding limit.
Section Planes Refer to Chapter 10 Section Planes for further information regarding Section
The view is determined by the original extents, these can be altered for example by Elements within the view
Sele Select ct two two elem elemen ents ts and and sele select ct Apply, the view updates to the sele select cte ed elem elemen ents ts as the the new new extents. The View View Frame Frame butt button on lock locks s the the view, switching off the view grips to re-position the view.
Curren Currentt Owner Update may need to be perfor performed med after setting the view limits. limits.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 93
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
8.4 .4.4 .4
Scal ale e & Dir irec ecttio ion n
The Scale and Direction groups are utilised as described for the View: Format 3D tab. The Scale group allows the definition of the scale for the created View. Three types of scale are available from the options list: Metric, Architectural, and Engineering. The Scale of the View is defined by entry to the Scale textbox or by selection of a default default scale from the options list.
The Auto option is used to produce an automatic scale for the view size on the Reference forms. occasion a Basic view is populated via the Drawlist Manager or or Reference The actual scale will be displayed in the Properties Grid. The operation also sets the through point to the coordinates corresponding to the centre of interest of the view. It is unlikely that the scale provided will conform to that of a recognised standard. The automatic scale is used as a guide in selecting the nearest or most suitable default scale.
The Direction group group allows allows the definit definition ion and valida validatio tion n (where (where the View is manipulated by other means) of the View direction and orientation.
8.4. 8. 4.5 5
Repr Re pres esen enta tati tion on St Sty yle les s
The Representation Styles group allows the control control of the View representation representation in the Draw Canvas through the definition of the View Type, Representation Style and Hatching Style.
The presented Representation Styles are as defined by the User Defaults. information. Refer to Chapter 13 Drawing Representation for further information.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 94
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 The following View Types may be selected from the View Type options list.
Global Hidden Line: produces a picture where all hidden lines are removed.
Local Hidden Line: produces a picture where all hidden lines are removed from equipment elements. Where two or more equipme equipment nt element elements s overlap overlap,, the overlap overlapping ping elements are shown in Wireline.
Modelled Wireline: produces slightly greater realism by blen blendi ding ng the the inter interse secti ction on of primi primiti tive ves, s, but but witho without ut incu incurr rring ing the the compu computa tati tiona onall over overhea heads ds of remov removin ing g hidden lines.
Universal Hidden Line: produces an image where all hidden lines are removed (as in Global Hidden Line), but in addition intersection lines between significant elements (e.g. EQUI and STRU, SUBS and BRAN) are generated.
Wireline: prod produc uces es a conv conven enti tion onal al wire wireli line ne pict pictur ure e showing showing all element elements s and P-Points. P-Points. This option is the quickest method to generate the view graphics.
Wireline Hidden Line: produces an image where hidden lines are removed within individual significant elements (EQUI, SUBS etc...), but not from items hidden behind them.
The Style options list displays the Representation Library (RPLB), as defined by the User Defaults, and contained Representation Ruleset (RRST ) elements that are used to control the display representation of the different types of Model elements within the View.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 95
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Hatching Rules options list displays the Representation Library, as defined by the User Defaults, and Rulesets (HRST ) that contained Hatching Rulesets that are are used used to cont control rol the hatch hatchin ing g of diffe differe rent nt types types of Model Model primitives and indicate any sections that may be applied.
Hatching ing and Representation Representation Libraries and Rulesets are usually created by the Draw Admini Administrator strator.. Hatch
8.4.6
Local Rules
The Local group allows allows the defini definitio tion n of local local Representation and Hatching Local Rules Rules group rules to be applied to the identified View.
The forms prompted by clicking the Representation and a nd Hatching buttons mirror the functionality provided by the Quick Representation form prompted on clicking the Rep. & Hatch Rules button in the Display group of the Home tab. information. Refer to Chapter 13 Drawing Representation for further information.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 96
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
8.4 .4.7 .7
Drawl wlis istt Ma Mana nage ger r
The Drawlist group allows the definition of View Drawlists by non-graphical selection.
Selecting the Manager button button from the Drawlist group displays the Drawlist Management form. form is also also prompted on selecting selecting the the Cutt Cutting ing Li s t in 2D 2D and 3D,… option from the Graphics form The form menu contained within the within the Us er and Li forms. er-Defined Defined View and Li mit mitss -Define -Defined d Vi ew forms.
The Drawlist Management form may be used to define define a View Drawlist by element selection from the Model Explorer members. members. When highlighted in the Model Explorer , the Add CE button is selected. The Drawlist Management form is then populated with the model element.
Management form Alternatively the model element can be dragged directly into the Drawlist Management form from from the the explorer.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 97
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 The options within the Drawlist Management form are:
Add CE
Explorer to Add the CE in the Model Explorer to the Drawlist
Add Rule
Add Rule set to the Drawlist
Add CE Within Limits
Add the the CE CE only only within within the view view limits
Remove CE
Remove the CE in the Model Explorer from from the Drawlist
Remove Rule
Remove Rule set from the Drawlist
Collections
Open the Collections Explorer
Delete Entry
Delete Entry from within within the Drawlist
Clean Up
Remove the unwanted unwanted elements from the Drawlist
Update Design
Update all design elements elements within within the Drawlist
Save
Save all changes to the Drawlist
Update Form from Current View
Drawlist is updated to the current selection
and New New Draw Drawli list st and options
Create, copy and delete Drawlist
draw drawli list st
Limit Limits s for the the Drawlist can be set indivi individua dually lly using appropriate appropriate co-ordinates, co-ordinates, set from CE or set from another view within the drawing. drawing.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 98
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
8.4.8
Update Current rent Owne Ownerr Upda Update te button The Cur button may be employed employed to update update view graphic graphics s and annota annotatio tions ns in the Draw Canvas whenever any settings on the View: Format 2D tab are modified and Automatic Automatic update design is not active within the Status bar.
8.4.9
Laser
For further details of Laser see TM-1821 Using Laser Models.
8.5 8. 5
Crea Cr eatin ting g a Us User er De Defi fine ned d Vi Vie ew – Wo Work rked ed Ex Exam ample ple
Navigate Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B02/S1 and ensure the previously created created View BUILDING B02 (PLAN NORTH) is the selected View and the Current Owner . The context context View: Format 2D tab is displayed and used throughout the Worked Example.
8.5.1 8.5 .1
Popula Pop ulatin ting g the Dra Drawlis wlistt (Wo (Worke rked d Exa Exampl mple) e)
Select the Manager button button from the Drawlist group of the View: Format 2D tab to display the Drawlist Management form.
Explorer er button If not already open, open the Model Explorer, select the Model Explor button from the Explorers group of the Tools tab. Zone BUILDING_B02. Navigate to the Site SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA02 and Add the Zone BUILDING_B02
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 99
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 The Structural Zone will be added to the Drawlist Management form.
Select and add the following Model Members.
Zone ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA02-B02 Zone ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA02-B02 (located in Site SITE-EQUIPMENT-AREA02). (locate ted d in Site Site SITE-CABLE-AREA02 and Zone Zone ZONE Cableway CWAY-LEVEL04-POWER (loca CWAY-AREA02).
Zone ZONE-HVAC-AREA02-B02 Zone ZONE-HVAC-AREA02-B02 (located in Site SITE-HVAC-AREA02). REFGRD AREA02_BUILDING_B02_GRID (located in GRIDWL REFERENCE_GRIDS ).
Select the Save button. To highlight the use of rules, select Remove Rule. Enter ALL ALL REFGRD as Member, in the Drawlist Management form.
Select the Save button and close the Drawlist Management form. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 100
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
8.5.2 8.5 .2
Sett the Vie Se View w Dir Direc ection tion & Sca Scale le (Wo (Worke rked d Exa Exampl mple) e)
Using the Direction group ensure the View is orientated as Down.
Focussing on the Scale group, ensure the scale type is set to Metric and select the Auto option from the Scale options list to define a scale for the created View. Noting the automatic scale presented in the Properties Grid , set the View Scale to a default 1:75 scale using the Scale options list.
Click the Update Current Owner button button from the Update group to update the View contents.
8.5.3 8.5 .3
Sett the Vie Se View w Re Repre presen senta tation tion (Wo (Worke rked d Exa Exampl mple) e)
Using the Representation Styles group and available options lists set the following representation representation styles.
View Type is set to Global.
Representation Style is set to TT TT/DRA/PRJ/REPW/GEN /DRA/PRJ/REPW/GEN/PRESENTATION /PRESENTATION.
Hatching Style is set to TT/DRA/PRJ/HRUL/GEN/Hatch-None.
The View is updated in the Draw Canvas as shown here.
Save Work.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 101
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exerci Exe rcise se 6
Basic Bas ic View View & UserUser-Def Define ined d Popula Populatio tion n
Usin Using g Chapte Chapterr 8 as a guid guide, e, nav navig igate ate to the Sheet DRWG-SLH_DE and, usin using g the the View: Format DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B0 TAIL-B02/S1 2/S1 and, Format 2D tab, create a second View as follows.
Create a Basic View: Centre Position
X 380mm
Y 600mm
Frame Size
Width 500mm Height 350mm Height 350mm
Create Create and define a Drawlist: Drawlist:
Zone BUILDING_B02 (located in Site SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA02).
Zone ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA02-B02 (located in Site SITE-EQUIPMENT-AREA02).
Cableway CWAY-LEVEL04-POWER (located in Site SITE-CABLE-AREA02 and Zone ZONE-CWAYAREA02 ). Zone ZONE-HVAC-AREA02-B02 (located in Site SITE-HVAC-AREA02).
drawlist will will need to be A s s ocia to the view, this will be apparent when Update Design is ociate ted d to The new drawlist performed. Drawlist here may also be formed using the Drawlist Drawlist of the first View. The Drawlist
View Information: Title
ROOF HANDRAIL & RUNG LADDER (EAST ELEVATION) ELEVATION)..
View Type Style
TT/DRA/PRJ/REPW/GEN/PRESENTATION.
Hatch Rule Direction Scale
Global
TT/DRA/PRJ/HRUL/GEN/Hatch-None. East Auto (1:75)
The Drawing will now be as follows:
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 102
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 To demonstrate the relationship between the View: Format 2D tab and the 3D View, select the Edit in 3D button from the Modify group to prompt the 3D View.
Remove the Building B02 walls from the East elevation. elevation. Reme membe mberr th that at may be Re used to select multiple elements in the 3D View.
Click the Apply button from the Complete group of the View: Format 3D tab to update the Draw Canvas as follows:
Select Zoom Extents from the Draw Power Wheel and Save Work. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 103
CHAPTER 9 View Creation: Projection & Detail Views This section examines the use of an existing View to create associated Projection and Detail Views. In both cases the source View determines the contents and representation of the proposed View. In addition, the creation workflow allows the inherent definition of position and, with a Detail View, scale.
9.1
Projectio ion n Vie iew w
The Projection View function and workflow allows the user to quickly form an orthographic projection view of an exis existi ting ng 2D ortho orthogon gonal al View. View. The orie orient ntat atio ion n of the the proje project cted ed view view in relat relatio ion n to the sourc source e view view is presen presented ted in the diagram below.
Projection View creation is initiated on clicking the Projection segmented button in the View group of the Home tab.
Alternatively, where a View has been selected in the Draw Canvas, Proj Projec ecti tion on View View crea creati tion on may may be init initia iate ted d via via the the Projection segmented button in the View group of the View: Format 2D tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
104
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 On clic clicki king ng the the Projection button button the Contextual Editor updates to prompt Select The user user must must sele select ct Select View View. The the required View to be projected by selection of the View frame or View content in the Draw Canvas.
already selected, selected, the Select View prompt prompt will not be displayed and the current View will Where a View is already be automatically selected. Selection is indicated by a 3D preview of the elements within the selected View and the Contextual Editor updating updating to prompt Specify Projection.
The Projection View direction is specified by moving the cursor to the appropriate side of the source View. The objects in the 3D preview will alter to reflect their appearance appearance from the selected direction. direction.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 105
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
placing of the Projection the Draw Power Wheel may be invoked by a Note that at any point during the placing
Cancellation or Confirmation of action. right-click right -click to allow navigation navigation of the Draw Canvas and Cancellation On positioning the view, the left mouse button is clicked to create the new Projection View .
When Automatic Update Design is turned on within the Status bar, the Projection View will update and display displ ay the 2D drawing representation representation on placem placement. ent. On creation of the Projection View, the Contextual Editor upda update tes s to prom prompt pt the the user user to Specify projection or . At this point the user may continue placing Projection Views about the original source View or finish the command by pressing the < Escape> key or the Finish tile from the Contextual Editor menu. menu.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 106
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
9.1. 9. 1.1 1
Quic Qu ick k Pr Proj ojec ecti tion on Vi Vie ew In a variation to the Projection View creation process, the 3D preview image can be supre supress ssed ed to incre increas ase e the the speed speed of view view gener generat atio ion n by using using the Quick Projection method. Quick Quick Projecti Projection on is identic identical al in workflo workflow w to that previou previously sly describ described ed and is initiat initiated ed by clicking Quick Projection from the Projection button options list.
9.2 9. 2
Proj Pr ojec ectio tion n Vi View ew – A Wo Work rked ed Ex Exam ampl ple e
Continuing with the Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1, a Projection View will be created for the View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) .
Select View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) by selection of the View frame or View content. Selection is indicated by the updating of the Properties Grid and the display of the View: Format 2D tab.
Click the Projection segmented button in the View group of the View: Format 2D tab.
Contextual Editor updates A 3D preview of the View content content is displayed displayed and the Contextual updates to prompt prompt Specify Projection.
Ensuring Automatic Update Design is turned on within the Status bar specify the Projection View direction by moving the cursor to the South of the source View, centring the view in approximate alignment with the 6 . Backing Backing Sheet marker 6 Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 107
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
6
On positioning the view, click the left mouse button to create the new Projection View .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 108
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to Specify projection or .
Contextual Editor Select Select the Finish tile tile from from the the Contextual menu. Select the created View by selection of the View frame or View content.
Title AREA 01 & AREA 03 (LOOKING NORTH) and set the Use the Properties Grid to enter the View Title AREA Frame Visibility to No
The Projection View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (LOOKING NORTH) is updated as follows.
In this example example the sou source rce View content content has bee been n defi defined ned by a lim limits its box and as such the lim limits its are automatically applied in the Projection View. This results in the View Frame adjusting to respect the limitdefined content. Select Zoom Extents from the Draw Power Wheel and Save Work.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 109
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
9.3
Detail View
A Detail View is used to highlight a specific area of an existing View. Detail View creation is initiated on clicking the Detail segmented button in the View group of the Home tab.
Alternatively, where a View has been selected in the Draw Canvas, Detail View creation may be initiated via the Detail button in the View group of the View: Format 2D tab.
On clicking the Detail button, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt Select View. The user must select the required View to be detailed by selection of the View frame or View content in the Draw Canvas.
Where a View is already already selected, selected, the Select View prompt prompt will not be displayed and the current View will be automatically selected. View selection is indicated by the Contextual Editor upda updati ting ng to promp promptt the the user user to Specify Specify the first first corner . The prompt is referring to the first corner of a square area in the selected View to be detailed.
Contextual Editor menu As an alternative, the Contextual allow allows s the the speci specifi fica cati tion on of a Polygon for the definit definition ion for the detailed area.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 110
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 For a square Detail View, the first corner of the proposed detail area is defined by a graphical pick in the Draw Canvas or by explicit positioning via the Contextual Editor fields. fields.
The required detail area is completed by the definition of the opposite corner via a graphical pick or by explicit positioning via the Contextual Editor fields. fields.
On definition of the area to be detailed, a shaded preview representing the selected area is displayed at the mouse cursor. The shaded preview displays the proposed Detail View scale at its centre.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 111
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The The scal scale e of the the new new Deta Detail il View View may may be alte altere red d prio priorr to placement in the Draw Canvas by selection of the Scale tile from the Contextual Editor menu. menu. On selection tile the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to Specify scale. A scale may be directly entered to the in the form 1:10 or 0.2 Contextual Editor in 0.2 .
On setting the required scale, the proposed Detail View may be placed at any point in the Draw Canvas.
The Detail View is updated. A primitive outline is placed in the source view to indicate the defined area.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 112
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
9.3. 9. 3.1 1
Poly Po lygo gon n De Deta tail il Vi Vie ew
As an alternative to the square detailed area, the tile may be selec selecte ted d from from the the init initia iall Polygon tile Contextual Contextual Editor menu menu when when prompt promptin ing g to select the first corner .
On select selecting ing the Polygon tile, tile, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to Specify a Point.
A series of points may be selected in the source view to create a polygon.
At any point in the selection of points, the menu allows ows the the Context Contextual ual Editor Editor men sele select ctio ion n of the the Previous poi poin nt if an erroneous erroneous point has been defined. defined.
Selecting Finish from the Contextual Editor menu menu or pressing the key completes the area definition. The proposed detail View is then displayed for positioning in the Draw Canvas and scaling.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 113
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
9.4 9. 4
Deta De tail il Vi Vie ew – A Wo Work rked ed Ex Exam ampl ple e
The following Worked Example will create a Detail View of the Fractionating Column C1101 in the context of the surrounding elements elements and connecting pipes. Continuing with the Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1, a Detail View will be created for the View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) .
Select View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) by selection of the View frame or View content. Selection is indicated by the updating of the Properties Grid and the display of the View: Format 2D tab.
Click the Detail button in the View group of the View: Format 2D tab.
In the Draw Canvas the Contextual Editor updates to prompt the user to locate the first corner of the proposed Detail View. Zoom to an area of the view encompassing the Equipment item C1101 and position the cursor at a point indicated by the image below.
The e co co-or -ordi dinat nate e pos posit itio ion n of the fi firs rstt co corn rner er wi will ll va vary ry be betwe tween en tr trai aini ning ng pro proje ject cts s du due e to th the e me meth thod od in cre creati ating ng Th this vie this view w i.e. the lim limits its box was alt altere ered d to accommoda accommodate te the bas base e sla slab b and remove remove pip pipewo ework. rk. In the Draw Canvas position X 3680mm, Y 12481mm is applicable. example given here an explicit Draw
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 114
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to locate the opposite corner of of the Detail View. Create a shaded area encompassing the Equipment item C1101 and connecting pipework. Position the cursor at a point indicated by the image below.
co-ordinate position position of the second corner corner will vary between training projects projects due to the use of Again, the co-ordinate
Draw Canvas position X the limits box in creating the source view. In the example given here an explicit Draw 6729mm, Y 9657mm is applicable. The shaded preview is displayed showing the proposed Detail View area and scale.
Select the Scale tile from the Contextual Editor menu. menu.
In the resultant prompt enter a scale 1:20 and note the change in the shaded preview area.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to locate the centre position of the Detail View.
X 475mm, Y 380mm Y 380mm and click the left mouse button Position the cursor at the explicit Draw Canvas position X 475mm
The Detail View is updated updated and a primitive is placed in the source view to indicate indicate the defined area. Select the created Detail View by selection of the View frame or View content.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 115
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 Use the Properties Grid to enter the View Title EQUIPMENT Title EQUIPMENT C1101 – DETAIL , alter the Frame Colour to Red Colour 2 and alter the View Visual Style to VIEW-TRAINING.
Make the source View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) the Current Owner and select the Outline (OUTL) primitive placed to indicate the Detail View. Use the Properties Grid to modify the Representation Colour and Fill Colour to Red Colour 2, and alter the Fill type to 8018 SystemStyle 18 and change the Line Type to 8011 Solid-Medium.
Select Zoom Extents from the Draw Power Wheel and Save Work. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 116
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exerci Exe rcise se 7
Detail Det ail Vie View w Cre Creati ation on
Navigate to Sheet DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B02/S1 and, using Chapter 9 as a guide, create Detail Views for the following Views.
View ROOF HANDRAIL & RUNG LADDER (EAST (EAST ELEVATION)
Set the Detail View Scale to 1:20. Position Position the Detail View at the explicit Draw Canvas X 125mm, Y 230mm Y 230mm. position X 125mm
Set the following following Properties for the Detail View :
Title RUNG LADDER (EAST ELEVATION) . View Title RUNG
Type Off . View Frame Line Type Off
Set the following following Properties for the OUTL:
Representati Representation on Colour and Red Colour 2 . and Fill Colour Red Fill type 8018 type 8018 System SystemStyle Style 18.
View BUILDING B02 (PLAN NORTH)
Set the Detail View Scale to 1:20. Position the Detail View at the the expl explic icit it Draw Canvas position X 250mm, Y 300mm Y 300mm.
Set the following following Properties for the Detail View :
View Title RUNG Title RUNG LADDER (PLAN NORTH) .
View Frame Colour to to Red Colour 2.
Set the following following Properties for the OUTL:
Representation Colour and Red Colour 2. and Fill Colour Red
Fill type 8018 type 8018 SystemStyle 18.
Select Zoom Extents from the Draw Power Wheel and Save Work.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 117
CHAPTER 10 Sections Planes The following chapter explores the use and definition of Section Planes within a drawing. A Section Plane within a View can add clarity to the depiction and highlight obscured elements.
10.1 Ove Overvie rview w AVEVA E3D Draw presents the ability to construct sections through specified design Model elements at the View level using intersecting planes. All Section Planes are database items and can therefore be used with more than one View. There are broadly three types of Section Plane that may be defined.
Flat Planes.
Planes. Perpendicular Planes.
Stepped Planes.
Sections may be created using the following methods.
Section View Produces a Section Plane in tandem with the creation of a Projection View and is defined using the orthogonal source view.
Limits-Defined Section Produces a Section Plane by the definition of View Limits and is specified on selection of Limits Box side(s).
Explicit Section Produces a Section Plane by explicit definition within the Draw Canvas using an existing View and the Contextual Editor .
All Planes are created and held within a Library structure; being owned by a Planes Library ( PLLB). To use a plane to produce a sectioned view of part of the design model, model, a View Section ( VSEC) element which refers to the appropriate plane element in the Planes Library must be created. The Planes Library is created automatically on the creation creation of the first first Section. Section. The appropria appropriate te type of Plane is then created as a member of the Planes Library, being referred to by the View Section.
10. 0.2 2
Sec ecti tion on Vie iew w
The following sequence will describe the definition of a Section Plane during View creation. The Section View creation method may be prompted by clicking the Section button within the View group of the Home tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
118
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Alternatively, where a View has been selected in the Draw Canvas, Section View creation may be initiated via the Section button in the View group group of the View: Format 2D tab.
An options list is available for Section butt button on allo allowi wing ng the the user user to sele select ct The quic quick k sect sectio ion n Quick Qui ck Sec Sectio tion n. The performs a section without a preview for speed.
On clicking the Section button the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt Select View.
The user must select the required View to be projected and sectioned by selection of the View frame or View content in the Draw Canvas.
Where a View is already already selected, selected, the Select View prompt prompt will not be displayed and the current View will be automatically selected. Selection is indicated by a 3D preview of the elements within the selected View and the Contextual Editor updating updating to prompt Specify Projection. The Projection View direction is specified by moving the cursor to the appropriate side of the source View. The objects in the 3D preview will alter to reflect their appearance appearance from the selected direction. direction.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 119
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Note that at any point during the placing placing of the Projection the Draw Power Wheel may be invoked by a right-click right -click to allow navigation navigation of the Draw Canvas and Cancellation Cancellation or Confirmation of action. On positioning the view, the left mouse button is clicked to confirm the proposed View and the Contextual updates to prompt Specify cutting plane position or Editor updates The Section Plane position is indicated in the source View by moving the cursor laterally across the View (Object Snapping may be utilised). A shaded area indicates the area to be removed.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 120
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
At this point, the Contextual Editor allows allows the user to switch from the default Stepped plane to choose Side clicking the Side tile from the Contextual Editor menu. On selection of the Section Plane position, a left mouse click confirms placement and generates a Section within the created View. Having selected the first placement you are still in the active command you can confirm a single point with a down arrow Finish or continue to create a Section Slice, i.e. two points
intelligent snap points to section through You can also use Shift key and invoke power wheel to filter intelligent design elements.
If the view type is wireline, wireline, the view will not be sectioned. sectioned.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 121
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
10.3 10. 3
Autom Au tomati atic c Sec Sectio tion n Ma Marks rks – Vie View w sec sectio tion n Ind Indica icator tor
When section views are added to a drawing, drawing, Automatic Section marks called View Section Section Indicator (VSI) can be assigned to display on both the source view and the section view. The VSI indicates the geometry, limits and look direction of the Vsec view plane on the source view, and displays a title on the section view. A VSI identifier character is allocated to the VSI in order to uniquely identify the section view (For example, A-A).
When the VSI and title are added to a drawing drawing they are assigned assigned a VSI library which controls controls their appearance. appearance. For example, the colours, line weights and text sizes that they are drawn in. The DRAW DRAW trainin training g project project is supplie supplied d with with the default default VSI library library which is initia initially lly assigned assigned to AVEVASECTION-HA-CHAINED, by default.
Everything3D Draw Admini Administratio stration n guide for more inform information ation.. Please see TM-1870 - AVEVA Everything3D
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 122
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 Modification of the section line symbol on the source view will also update the section as shown below.
produce a section mark If a section slice is used i.e two points, only the first first section point will produce
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 123
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
10.4 10 .4
Sect Se ction ion Vi View ew – A Wo Work rked ed Ex Exam ample ple
Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1. A Section Section View will be created for the View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) . Select View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) by selection of the View frame or View content. Selection is indicated by the updating of the Properties Grid and the display of the View: Format 2D tab.
Click the Section button in the View group of the View: Format 2D tab.
Contextual Editor updates A 3D preview of the View content content is displayed displayed and the Contextual updates to prompt prompt Specify Projection.
Ensuring Automatic Update Design is turned on within the Status bar specify the Projection View direction by moving the cursor to the West of the source View. Centre the created View at the Draw Canvas position aligned with the Backing Sheet E marker (approximate Draw Canvas position X 400mm X 400mm).
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 124
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Indicate the cutting plane by moving the cursor across the source view to cut the centre of equipment item C1101-COLUMN.
required d use the < S hi ft > key and Draw Draw Power Wheel to filter Owner Owner Object Snap for selection of If require Equipment C1101. The Section View is created but the position requires modification to avoid overlap with neighbouring Views. Adjust the central View position using the View Position grip to the explicit position X 475mm X 475mm Y Y 661mm 661mm.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 125
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Use the Properties Grid to enter the View Title COLUMN Title COLUMN C1101 SECTION (LOOKING EAST) and set the Frame Line Type to OFF .
Section View View COLUMN COLUMN C1101 C1101 SECTION SECTION (LOOKIN (LOOKING G EAST) EAST) is updated The Section updated as shown shown with with Automati Automatic c Sectio Section n Marks and View title automatically automatically added.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 126
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
example the sou source rce View content content has bee been n defi defined ned by a lim limits its box and as such the lim limits its are In this example automatically applied in the Section View. This results in the View Frame adjusting to respect the limitdefined content.
Select Zoom Extents from the Draw Power Wheel and Save Work.
10.5 10 .5
Limi Li mits ts-D -Def efin ined ed Se Sect ctio ion n Vi View ew
The following sequence will describe the definition of a Section Plane by the use of the View Limits. The Limits section within the View: Format 3D tab allows the definit definition ion of limits limits defined Views.
The Limits from Drawlist button sets the 3D limits of the View to a volume that will enclose all the items in the view drawlist.
This is the view frame lock lock on or off. off. If the the view view frame frame is unlo unlocke cked, d, the the frame frame becomes independent of the view limits and is unaffected by any alteration to the view content or limits via 3D view or update commands
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 127
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Limits Volume is indica indicated ted within within the 3D View by a shaded cube.
The Limit Limit co-o co-ordi rdinat nates es area area of the group group is acti activa vated ted on clicki clicking ng the Limits button n and is init initia ially lly Limits fro from m Dra Drawlis wlistt butto populated with the limits of the current drawlist.
The require required d View limits limits can be set by defini defining ng the orienta orientatio tion n and directly entering explicit project co-ordinates into the six co-ordinate co-ordinate textboxes within within the Limits section section or defined defined graphically graphically by manipulation manipulation of the Limits volume volume box.
Not Note e the limits limits can be input as plu plus s or minus in all directi directions ons.. When negativ negative e val values ues are entered entered the correspondin corresp onding g cardinal direction will be switc switched, hed, e.g. East to West.
Checking Checking the toggle adjacent adjacent to the limit position position will will create create a section section plane plane. The section is created from the plane of the view limit face defined by the given position.
10.6 10. 6
Limits Lim its-De -Defin fined ed Sec Sectio tion n Vie View w – A Wor Worked ked Exa Exampl mple e
Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1; updated as shown below with the created created Section View. A Limits-Defined Limits-Defined Section View will now be created.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 128
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Navigate to the Home tab and select select the Quick button from the View Group.
The Model Explorer is is automatically prompted prompted for element navigation and drawlist creation.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 129
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Navigate to the Zone ZONE-EQUIPMENTselect Equipment item EQUI AREA01 and select C1101. Using the right-click context menu select the Quick View Creation option.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the location of the first corner of the View. Sele Select ctin ing g the the Centre ti tile from the menu, centre the View Contextual Editor menu, at X 110mm, Y 190mm and click the left mouse button. Define a View Width 120mm and Height 200mm.
The The View View is pop populat ulated ed and and crea create ted d to a defa defaul ultt scal scale e and and representation.
Sele Select ct the the View, View, by selec selecti ting ng the the View View frame frame or Cont Conten ent, t, and and from from the promp prompte ted d View: Format 2D tab, select the Edit in 3D button. The View: Format 3D tab is presented.
Navigating Navigating to the Limits group, select the Limits from Drawlist button and set the View Direction to East.
Define Limits group Naviga Navigate te to the Define group and and enter enter the the explicit explicit co-ordinate co-ordinate 103420mm into into the the uppe upper r Up textbox.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 130
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Defined Limit is reduced in size and the view is displayed. displayed.
The Volume limits can also be adjusted manually using the grip handles.
To define an appropriate scale for the View, ensure the Scale type is set to Metric and select 1:20 from the Scale options list within the Scale group.
At this point it is prudent to click the Freeze button from the Remember group. group.
Select Select the checkbo checkbox x adjace adjacent nt to the upper upper Up limit position to create a Section Plane from the plane of the view limit face defined by the given position.
Set the View Direction to Iso 3 and select the Display button within the Section group. group.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 131
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Section plane can now be seen in Green. The Green. The Green Teeth indicate which side is to be sectioned.
A second section will now no w be created to cut the Equipment Column C1101 in the vertical direction.
The Limits Box handle may be used but to achieve an exact position, navigate to the Define Limits group and enter the explicit explicit co-ordinate 316650mm into the first West textbox.
Check the section toggle adjacent to the West limit position to create a second Section Plane - indicated below in green.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 132
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Click Click the Restore button button from the Remember group group to retu return rn the the view view to the the previously saved position and click the Apply button from the Complete group to form the View.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 133
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The View is created with the two defined Section Planes.
Using the View Position Grip , reposition the created View at X 115mm, Y 190mm Y 190mm. the explicit Draw Canvas position X 115mm Depending ing on the keyboard orientation, orientation, Absolute mode is Depend accessed by pressi accessed pressing ng the < s hi ft > and <@ > keys. keys. Further, the <@ > key is pressed to switch to the two co-ordinate mode.
Use the Properties Grid to enter the View Title SKIRT SKI RT DETA DETAIL IL (SE (SECTI CTION ON – LOO LOOKIN KING G EAS EAST) T) and set the Frame Visibility to No .
Select Zoom Extents from the Draw Power Wheel and Save Work.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 134
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
10.7 10 .7
Expl Ex plic icit it Se Sect ctio ion n Cr Crea eati tion on
The following sequence will describe the definition of a Section Plane by the use of the Section Plane button and Contextual Editor .
On selection of the View in the Draw Canvas, Section View creation may be initiated initiated via the Create button in the Section group of the View: Format 2D tab.
On selection of the Create button the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to specify a point in the View or to choose an alternative Section Plane.
On selection of the Section Plane function the default method is Stepped. The Contextual Editor menu menu offers the user the opportunity to select the Perpendicular , Flat or View View methods by clicking the appropriate tile (or using key letter). letter).
10.7 10 .7.1 .1
Step St eppe ped d Se Sect ctio ion n
Taking the default Section Plane option of Stepped prompting the specification specification of Stepped; on the Contextual Editor prompting a point, the user is able to specify several points in the identified View (using Object Snapping if required). The formed plane and shaded area indicates the area which will be removed from the view.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 135
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
On sel selecti ection on of the the requ requiired red poin points ts,, the the menu update updates s to offer offer the Contextual Contextual Editor menu opportunity to:
Alter the Side of the plane that will be retained and discarded.
Close the identified points to form an outline shape in the View. This may be reversed by using the replacement Contextual Editor menu menu option Open.
Revert Back to the previously created point of the Section Plane and reposition.
Finish the selection and form the Section Plane.
The example here is updated as shown.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 136
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
10.7 10 .7.2 .2
Perp Pe rpen endic dicula ularr Pl Plan ane e
Selecting the Perpendicular tile tile from the initial Section Plane Contextual Editor prompt prompt allows the definition of a Section Plane perpendicular to the View Direction. A Perpendicular Plane does not require a Direction to be defined in creation. On selection of a Perpendicular Plane, the user is prompted to specify a Point. On specifying a point in the View, using Object Snapping if required, a Section Plane is immediately immediately created. created.
10. 0.7. 7.3 3
Fla latt Pl Plan ane e
Selecting the Flat tile from the initial Section Plane Contextual Editor prompt prompt allows the definition of a Flat Section Section Plane of varying varying orientation. orientation. On selection of the Flat Plane option, the user is prompted to specify a Point. The user is able to specify a position point followed by an orientation point in the identified View (using Object Snapping if required). The formed plane and shaded area indicates the area which will be removed from the view.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 137
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
During During the definitio definition n of the Flat Contextuall Editor Editor Plane Plane,, the Contextua menu updates to offer the opportunity to:
Create a Perpendicular Section Section Plane
Create a Stepped Section Plane
Create a Section Section Plane from View
Restrict Restrict the plane orientation orientation to the Horizontal in relation to the View.
Restrict Restrict the plane orientation orientation to the Vertical in relation to the View.
Restrict Restrict the plane plane orientation orientation to a specified specified Angle in relation to the View.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 138
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
10. 0.7. 7.4 4
Fro rom m Vie iew w
Selecting the View tile from the initial Section Plane Contextual Editor prompt allows the definition of a Stepped Section Plane through the specification of several points in a prompted 3D View.
On select selecting ing the View tile tile,, the View View transforms to a 3D View representation and and the the user user is prom prompt pted ed to specify projection. Indi Indica cati ting ng by movi moving ng the the mouse, the 3D View may be orientated as dictated by the desired Section to be created.
The Stepped Section is then defined as previously described.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 139
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
On defini definition tion of the Stepped Stepped Sectio Section, n, the View returns to the 2D representation and true true orie orient ntat atio ion n but but inte inters rsec ecte ted d by the the defined plane.
10.8
Sections Sect ions Plane Planes s within the Dra Draw w Canva Canvas s – Dis Display play,, Creat Creation ion and Modif Modificati ication on
Having created a section plane within the 2D Draw Canvas it is possible to modify the section using grips.
To display the section plane make the view current selection selection (This will show the blue grips)
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 140
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Selecting Selecting the Display button in the Section Group of the View: will display display the sectio section n View: Format Format 2D Tab will plane.
Selecting the Additional Grips (F4) status bar toggle will show all grips. In this instance the Add Vertices grips.
When the section is displayed the blue modify grips are also shown.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 141
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
1. Add Vertex Vertex Grip Grip, allows user to add additonal points along the section.
2. Central Positon Grip, allows user to move the whole section positon.
3. Flip Section Section Grip Grip, allow users to change the section section side.
4. Rotation Rotation Grip Grip, allows ows user ser to chan change ge the angle angle of the secti section on plane.
5. Stret Stretch ch Grip Grip, allows user to chan change ge posi positi tion on of indi indivi vidu dual al points.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 142
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
10.9 10. 9
Steppe Ste pped d Sec Sectio tion n – A Wor Worked ked Ex Examp ample le
Navi Navigat gate e to the the Sheet Sheet DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B02/S1 and ensu ensure re the the previ previous ously ly creat created ed View View ROOF HANDRAIL & RUNG LADDER (EAST ELEVATION) is selected and the Current Owner . The context context View: Format 2D tab is displayed and used throughout the Worked Example. Handrail elements – The purpose of the View here is to highlight the Building 02 Roof Rung Ladder and Handrail roof and stairwell. To draw focus to these elements and to allow an increase in view scale, a stepped section will be utilised.
Draw Canvas Canvas, On sele select ctio ion n of the the View View in the the Draw Section View creation may be initiated via the Create button in the Section group of the View: Format 2D tab. On selection of the Create button, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to specify a point in the View or to choose an alternative Section Plane.
Utilise the default Stepped Section Plane function.
Select the item GENSEC 9 of FRMWORK/B02_LEVEL_02_BEAMS .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 143
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Select the item GENSEC 22 of FRMWORK/B02_LEVEL_02_BEAMS .
The tooltip HINT will show if there are coincident points, the Page UP & Page Down keys cycle through the available points, when the desired point is highlighted in white left click to select.
When the user user is snapping snapping during during an operation, and there are more than one snap snap in in the th e same positi position on on the paper i.e. coincident points, the points list is displayed. This will allow will allow the correct positon to be selected. Select the item GENSEC 29 of FRMWORK/B02_LEVEL_01_BEAMS .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 144
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Select the item GENSEC 31 of FRMWORK/B02_LEVEL_01_ BEAMS. BEAMS.
Select the item GENSEC 6 of FRMWORK/B02_LEVEL_02_BEAMS.
Select the item GENSEC 3 of FRMWORK/B02_LEVEL_02_BEAMS.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 145
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
required the the Object Snapping filtering may be employed via the Draw Power Wheel. If required The formed plane and shaded area indicates the area which will be removed from the view.
Contextual Editor menu select From From the Contextual select Finish to form the Section Plane.
Update Design is not active within within the Status bar, an explicit Update Current Current Owner may be If Automatic Update required requi red to view changes.
Make View the current selection and select Display in the Section Group of the View: Format 2D Tab. The intelligent snap connections are highlighted in yellow.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 146
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Stretch bottom LEFT grip to new Snap point Pline MEML of GENSEC 3
Stretch the bottom RIGHT grip to new Snap point Pline MEML of GENSEC 5
appropriate Snap settings to edit the positions of the grips. To aid the above exercise use the appropriate
The View ROOF HANDRAIL & RUNG LADDER (EAST ELEVATION) will now resemble resemble the following: following:
Using a View Scale Grip, rescale the View to 1:50 through mouse movement in the Draw Canvas.
The View Frame sho should uld not requ require ire adjustmen adjustmentt to accommodate new Scale.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 147
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 Using the Properties Grid set the View Frame Line Type to Off . The Sheet DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B02/S1 now resembles the following. following.
10.10
Section Sect ion Planes Planes within the 3D Vie View w – Display Display,, Creation Creation and and Modificat Modification ion
The following sequence will describe the definition of a Section Plane within the 3D View by the use of the Create button and Contextual Editor .
Where a Section Plane exists in the View, the prompting of the Display button updates the 3D View to display the present planes.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 148
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
An existing Flat section plane has been displayed.
Double Double Clicki Clicking ng on the sectio section n plane plane will will display display Grips. For For a flat flat sect sectio ion n plane plane,, Positon, Flip and Rotate grips are available.
The Create button from the Section group of the View: Format 3D tab prompts the creation of Section planes within the EDIT in 3D mode. This This can can be also also invo invoked ked usin using g the the Powe PowerWh rWhee eell 9 o’clock gesture.
On first entering the 3D view, the LCS is set perpendicular to the view direction to support the creation of section. section. within Where the view direction is altered within the 3D view the LCS will require realignment prior to section creation. This can be controlled by the PowerCompass. Forr furt Fo rth her deta taiils on LCS ref efe er to Foundations guide.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 149
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The default Section option within the 3D View is Stepped; the Contextual prompts the Contextual Editor prompts user user to spec specify ify points points in the 3D View View (usin (using g Object Snapping if required).
To finish press return or F Tile, alternatively the down arrow will provide the following following options.
Plea Please se see Sec Sectio tion n Planes Planes with within in the Dra Draw w Canvas for more information on contextual editor options.
A completed stepped section plane below shows the grips activated. The section plane grips can be modified in the exact same way as described in the 2D Section creation. For a Stepped section plane, Positon, Flip Rotate and Add Vertices Vertices grips are available. Please se see Sec Sectio tion n Planes Planes with within in the Dra Draw w Plea Canvas Canv as fo forr mo more re in info forma rmatio tion n on ho how w to manipulate section plane grips.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 150
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 The following describes the additional functions available within the Section Group of the Format 3D View form.
The Delete section plane button is activated when a section plane is selected within the 3D View. A section plane can be identified as selected when the grips are shown. When the desired section plane is selected clicking Delete will remove it from the 3D View.
individual points by selecting the appropriate stretch stretch grips You can also de-select individual
The Cutting options list details the available Drawlists. The The items to be cut by the plane will be those referred to by the sele select cted ed list list.. If World is select selected, ed, all items items in the owning owning View’s Drawlist will be cut.
The Direction options list allows the user to define a vector normal to the plane for flat planes or the direction of plane extrusion extrusion for stepped planes.
Select Open to define the plane as an open ended shape. For example, an L shape consisting of two planes. Select Closed to define the plane as a closed shape. For example, example, a rectangle. rectangle.
Compass within the edit in 3d mode is switched switched off by defaul default, t, this can be controlled by both The Power Compass the PowerWheel & options area. See foundations guide for more details.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 151
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
10.11 10. 11
Cuttin Cut ting g Lists Lists with within in the the 2D 2D Draw Draw Ca Canva nvas s A drawlist can be set up to define the objects to be sectioned by the created section plane, this is known as the Cutting List. This allows the user to define a new drawlist or reference an existing, sectioning only those items within the 3D View. By default the cutting list is set to the views full drawlist, this means that newly created section planes will section every design element within the view in which the plane intersects.
The following describes the process in order to define and apply a cutting list to a section plane within the draw canvas. canvas. The above view is populated with various design elements EQUIPMENT , STRUCTURE, PIPES and CIVIL. The following example will define a cutting list to section only the STRUCTURAL elements
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 152
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Sele Select ctin ing g the Drawli Drawlist st Man Manag ager er within the Drawlist Group Format 2D displays the current views contents...
Selecting the Cutting List button will display the Drawlist Manager
Drawlis wlistt from Selecting New Dra from the the option list will allow allow the user to create create a new Drawlist.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 153
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
A prompt will be displayed asking for the a name, in this case us e STRUCTURAL-OMITTED
Elemen ments can be added to the Draw Drawli list st in this this examp example le the the SITESTRUCTURAL-AREA-01
Crea Create te a sectio crossin ing g section n plane plane, cross structural elements. The result result shows shows the sectio section n plane plane cutting cutting all elements within the view. view.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 154
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Cutting List options Use the Cutting options list list to select STRUCTURAL-OMITTED.
Select the Selection button adjacent adjacent to the cutting list ,
A selection prompt will be initiated, selecting the section and return will then apply the cutting list.
design may be required required to An update design show changes.
The resul resultan tantt view view show shows s the the sect sectio ion n plane plane has has been been appl applie ied d but but only only secti section onin ing g the SITESTRUCTURAL AREA-01
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 155
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Cutti Cutting ng lists can also be applied to Stepped section planes. planes. Applying Applying a cuttin cutting g list to a secti section on within the 3D View is a similar process, however the section plane needs to be selected first then the cutting list is selected after.
10.12
Clipping Clippi ng & Capp Capping ing of of Section Section Plan Planes es within the 3D 3D View View
Clipping and capping can also be applied within the 3D View to Flat Orthogonal section plane.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 156
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Selecting the Clip Plane button within the Clipping section of view: view: Format 3D will prompt the user to select a section plane to clip.
Having selected the section, the design elements behind the plane will be removed from the 3D view. The elements can be restored by clicking on the section again.
Not Note e the section section pla plane ne cli clip p onl only y wor works ks on flat ort orthogo hogonal nal section planes.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 157
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Selecting the Cap button within the Clipping group of view: Format 3D will apply a solid hatch to the sectioned elements. The capping can be removed by clicking the button again.
Here shows the capping applied to the sectioned elements.
controlled led in the graphic graphics s settings please see foundations foundations guide for more The colour of capping can be control information inform ation on 3D view settin setting. g.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 158
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exerci Exe rcise se 8
Secti Se ction on Pla Planes nes
Navi Naviga gate te to the the Shee Sheett DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 and and using sing the the Limi Limits ts of the the Equipment Item Column C1101, create two Limits-Defin Limits-Defined ed Section Section Views with the following following information. information.
SECTION A – A (EL. 114350mm to EL. 122962mm)
Set the View Direction to Down.
Set the View Scale to 1:20.
Position the Section View at the explicit Draw Canvas position X 115mm X 115mm, Y 660mm Y 660mm.
Up 114350mm 114350mm. Section Section Plane Plane at Lower Position: Position: Up Title SECTION A – A (EL. 114350mm Enter the View View Title SECTION to EL. 122962mm) and set the Frame Visibility to No .
SECTION B – B (EL. 100305mm to EL. 114320mm)
Set the View Direction to Down.
Set the View Scale to 1:20.
Position the Section View at the explicit Draw Canvas X 115mm, Y 435mm Y 435mm. position X 115mm
Up 114320mm 114320mm. Section Section Plane Plane at Upper Position: Position: Up Enter the View View Title SECTION B – B (EL. 100305mm to EL. 114320mm) and set the Frame Visibility to No .
Check, and if necessary modify, the created Sections within the EDIT in 3D Mode.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 159
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Using view SKIRT DETAIL (SECTION - LOOKING EAST)
Apply a Cutting List to the Vertical section plane with C1101-SKIRT as the only member in the drawlist apply this in the edit in 3D mode.
Select Zoom Extents from the Draw Power Wheel and Save Work.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 160
CHAPTER 11 Dimension Annotation The following chapter describes the definition and use of dimension annotation in the AVEVA E3D Draw module.
11.1 11 .1
Dime Di mens nsio ion n El Ele eme ment nt
Dimensi Dimensions ons are calcula calculated ted direct directly ly from from the model with the user able able to control control the format, format, content content and appearance of the created dimension. To aid this process and to ensure consistency across drawings, the Draw Administrator Administrator is able to define suitable project defaults and an appropriate appropriate Visual Style. Direct reference to the data results in the annotation always reflecting the current state of the model through a simple update annotation operation. Once the dimensions have been created, the position and orientation of dimensions dimensions can be adjusted adjusted graphically. graphically. There are four generic dimension types available in AVEVA E3D Draw that allow intelligent dimensions to be created.
11.1 11 .1.1 .1
Linear Dimension (LDIM)
Angular Dimension (ADIM)
Radial Dimension (RDIM)
Pitch Circle Dimension (PDIM)
Dime Di mens nsion ion Hi Hier erar arch chy y
Through the concept of the Current Owner dimensions dimensions may be created for a View or Region without a need to reference the Draw Explorer . The Dimension Dimension and defining defining the Dimension Dimension Points (DPPT) are automatically automatically created and placed beneath an administrative LAYE element as the View is dimensioned.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
161
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The following diagram illustrates illustrates the Draw hierarchy in regards regards to dimension dimension creation.
Whi While le Di Dimen mensi sion on Poi Points nts (D (DPP PPT) T) ar are e sh shown own in the abo above ve hi hiera erarc rchy hy,, it is al also so po possi ssibl ble e to cre creat ate e the di diffe fferi ring ng dimension dimen sion points Dimension Before/After Before/After (DPBA) and Dimen Dimension sion from 3D (DPOI).
11.1 11 .1.2 .2
Dime Di mens nsion ion Pr Prop oper erti ties es
A dimension is defined by a sequence of Dimension Points and is formed by the definition of a number of Propert Properties ies.. The forming forming proper propertie ties s vary vary between between Dimensi Dimension on Types Types and are describ described ed in the proceed proceeding ing sections. sections. The foremost dimension dimension properties are as follows.
Dimension Point
Defines Defines the element element to be be dimensioned dimensioned and and may be defined defined by an Object Object Snap point. A Linear Dimension must contain at least two dimension points.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 162
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Dimension Line
An indicating indicating line between Dimension Points at a Position define defined d by the user user on creati creation, on, usually usually accompan accompanied ied by Dimensi defining identified identified Dimension on Text defining measurement.
Projection Line
An indicating indicating line linking linking each Dimension Point to the Dimension Line at an Offset and Direction as defined by the user.
Projection tion Line Line Text can An accompanying Projec can be util utilis ised ed to indi indica cate te the the dimensioned element. This is aided by the use of Intelligent Text definitions whereby whereby the element element name is intrin intrinsic sically ally linked linked to the output text i.e. i.e. the annotation will reflect the element name regardless of any alterations in Model.
11.1 11 .1.3 .3
Draw Dr aw Po Powe werr Wh Whee eell
A Dimension may be created and manipulated thro throug ugh h the the use use of the the Draw Draw Power Power Wheel Wheel and secondary Annotate Power Wheel. The Draw Power Wheel may be used in conjunction Dimension grips to spec with with the Dimension specify ify an acti action on or Object Snap point.
In addition, on creating a Dimension, the user may invoke the Draw Power Wheel via a right-click of the mouse combined with pressing the key to restrict mouse selection to a specific Object Snap point.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 163
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
On selecting the Dimension, the User may invoke the Power Wheel via a right-click of the mouse and select actions such as Copy, Paste and Move.
Dimension grip, the user On selecti selecting ng a Dimension user may invoke invoke the Draw Power Wheel via a right-click of the mouse to confirm / cancel an navigate the Draw Canvas. action or navigate
11.1 11 .1.4 .4
Prop Pr oper erti ties es Gr Grid id
On selection, as with all standard Draw elements, it is possible to modify the properties of the Dimension via the Properties Grid. The Properties Grid offers an efficient and quick user workflow to alter Dimension geometry, representation and visibility by selection or direct direct entry.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 164
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Intelligent Text The Properties Grid allows the direct input of text for the definition of Dimension and Projection Line text. It is important to ensure intelligence throughout the drawing and the use of ‘free text’” is minimised - wherever possible, text should be derived from the Database. The concept of Intelligent Text allows the naming and referencing of element properties in the drawing and be assured that any changes to the model will be reflected in the Drawing. Intelligent text is marked by a preceding # symbol e.g. #NAME and #POS will resolve to annotate the element name and position. position. With a slash preceding AVEVA E3D Model element names, it is often necessary to remove this slash on naming elements in AVEVA E3D Draw. This is possible using Intelligent Text: #NAME(C2:) i.e. Name starting at Character 2. Modification to Dimension text is also possible by a double left-click on the identified text in the Draw Canvas and by entry to the prompted Text Editor and and ancillary Intelligent Text selector.
information on Intelli Intelligent gent Text, Text Symbol Symbols s and Text Substri Substrings. ngs. A ppendi x D gives more information
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 165
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
11.1 11 .1.6 .6
Vert Ve rtex ex Ed Edit itor or
As an extension to the Properties Grid, an individual dimension vertex may be modified by the use of the Vertex Editor .
The Vertex form is promp prompte ted d on Vertex Editor form clicking the Vertex Editor button button within the Properties Grid.
The Vertex Editor form allows the selection of an individual dimension vertex (dimension point) through selection from the Vertices list. The selected vertex is highlighted in the Draw Canvas and the Selected Vertex Properties Grid is updated.
By default the properties of an individual vertex are set By Owner i.e. i.e. the owning dimension, but may be overridden by direct entry or selection in the grid.
opening of the vertex editor editor the splitt splitter er button may need to used to expand down the form in On initial opening order to see the entire editor. Please see foundation guide for form behavior and use.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 166
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
11.1 11 .1.7 .7
Dime Di mens nsion ion Vi Visu sual al St Styl yle e
A Visual Style controls the representation of a dimension by the element adopting the preset properties of the style on creation or by modification. The use of a Visual Style ensures the consistency of annotation within the Sheet and across a series of Drawings. The properties of the Visual Style are determined by the Draw Administrator and any further alterations to the Dimension Visual Style are reflected in each instance the style has been referenced.
TM-187 1870 0 AVE VA E veryt verything3D hing3D Refer to TM-
™
Draw A dm dminis inis tra tration tion for further information on the definition
of a Dimension Visual Style. The Visual Style may be specified prior to Dimension creation by setting the style within the Active Visual Styles group of the Annotate tab.
Alternatively, the Visual Style may be retrospectively modified modified via the Properties Grid. Note the Dimensi properties, controlled controlled by the Dimension on Text properties, Visual Style, are set to By Style to ensure the Visual Style is adopted. explicitly altered from the defined Visual Visual Style (By Style) Style),, the Where a Dimension property has been explicitly
Defaultss butt Dime Di mens nsio ion n ma may y be re rese sett to ad adopt opt th the e Vi Visu sual al St Styl yle e by clicki clicking ng th the e S et to Default button on on th the e Properties Grid .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 167
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
11.1 11 .1.8 .8
Dime Di mens nsio ion n Gr Grip ips s
In addition to the Properties Grid (and Vertex Editor ), ), grips grips allows allows direct direct graphi graphical cal modific modificati ation on of the dimension properties. Common dimension type grips are outlined below with specific dimension type grips explained within the following sections.
Linear Dimension Grips
Angular Dimnesion Grips
Dimension Point Grip
Select Selection ion of the Dimension Point grip allows allows modific modificati ation on to the Dimension Dimension Point position and connection point. The appearance of the grip is linked to whether the dimension is intelligently linked to the modelled element; crucial in ensuring the dimension reflects the current state of the model. A yellow circular grip indicates the Dimension Point has snapped to an intelligent object point such as a P-Point or Element. A blue square grip indicates the Dimension Point is not connected to a model element.
Intelligent Grip
Non-Intelligent Grip
Refer to 11.6 Dimension Reference Check for for further information on ascertaining whether an annotation connection point is intelligent or non-intelligent.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 168
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Dimension Line Position Grip
Selection of the Position grip controls the position of the Dimension Line.
Dimension Text Grip
Selection of the Text grip allows the adjustment of the dimension and projection text position relative to the Dimension Line.
Dimension Addition Grip
Selection of the Addition grip (+ icon) adds a new Dimension Point for connection.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 169
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
To display rotation grips and projection line grips on the draw canvas, make sure additional grips on/off is is highlighted on the status bar. Refer to status bar section for further details.
Dimension Dimension Text Rotation Rotation Grip Grip
Selection Selection of the first text first text rotati rotation on grip will grip will control the angle of the individual dimension text
Input an angular value in the field and press Enter or or click to identify the rotation angle
Dimension Dimension Text Overall Overall Rotation Rotation Grip
Selection of the second text rotati rotation on grip will control the angle of all dimension text in one go.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 170
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Input an angular value in the field and press Enter or or click to identify the rotation angle.
Dimension Dimension Project Project Line Overshoot Overshoot and Clearance Clearance Length using using Grip
Sets the Linear (LDIM) or Angular (ADIM) overshoot and clearance properties using grip points. The grip points display as a double-headed double-headed triangle
Input a dimensional value in the field and press Enter or or click to identify the overshoot or clearance length.
overshoot property can also be modified using the Projection Projection line field on the Propert Properties ies window The overshoot
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 171
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
11.1.9 Dimension Deletion A Dimension Point can be deleted by identification in the Draw Canvas of the Dimension Point Grip and clicking the Delete button from the Home tab or by pressing the < Delete> key.
Alternatively, on selecting the required Dimension Point to be deleted, a left mouse click on the Dimension Bin icon in the bottom right corner of the Draw Canvas deletes the Dimension Point.
The Draw Explorer may also be used to delete Dimension Points but without the reassurance of graphical feedback / picking in the Draw Canvas. Selection of Delete via the right-click context menu prompts a confirmation message.
11.1.1 11. 1.10 0
Dimens Dim ension ion Too Tools ls
In addition to the Properties Grid and Draw Canvas grips, a dimension may also be modified by utilising the Gap and Blanking utilities found within the Annotate tab.
Blanking blank dimensions in a view aids clarity. The ability to hide or blank
Utilising the Tools group of the Annotate tab, a Blanking Margin may be applied to a dimension. dimension. This margin margin obscures elements beneath to the specified distance from the dimension line.
Linear Dimension without Blanking
Linear Dimension with Blanking
dimension is created without blanking blanking and to a 0mm Blanking Margin. Margin. By default, a dimension
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 172
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
11.1.12 11.1. 12 Gap The ability to apply a gap to a dimension aids in the organization and clarity of a View. Utilising the Gap button within the Annotate group of the Annotate tab, a Gap may be applied to a selected dimension.
Defining a gap for dimension annotation trims any Projection Lines intersecting with area. On clicking the Gap button from the Annotate group the user is prompted, where the dimension has not already been selected, to select the required dimension.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification of the first gap point or, on selecting the Centre menu option, the gap centre.
Continuing with the specification of the first gap point and utilising Object Snapping, the Projection Line may be selected at a point adjacent to the required area.
On selection of the first gap point, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification of the second gap point. Utilising Object Snapping and observing the Draw Canvas feedback feedback indicating indicating gap area, area, a second second point is selected on the Projection Line.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 173
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Contextual Editor upda The Contextual update tes s to allo allow w the the user user to continue creating gaps for the selected dimension; undo the previous gap definition or finish the command.
The Gap is inserted.
The inserted Gap is highlighted on selecting the dimension. Through the use of associated grips, the gap size and position can be easily modified.
A Gap can be deleted by selection of the Gap in the Draw Canvas and clicking the Delete button from the Home tab or by pressing the < Delete> key.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 174
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Alternatively, on selecting the required Gap to be deleted, a left mouse click on the Dimension Bin icon in the bottom right corner of the Draw Canvas deletes the Gap.
Explode The Explode tool is located in the Modify group of the Explode tab and may be utilised to alter a Dimension to be formed by primitives.
The use of the Explode tool allows the independent modification of the constituent parts of a dimension.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 175
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
11.2 11 .2
Line Li near ar Dim imen ens sio ions ns
A Linear Dimension is defined by a sequence of Dimension Dimension Points in a linear linear arrangemen arrangementt and is formed by the definition of the following Properties.
Dimension Point
Defines Defines the element element to be be dimensioned dimensioned and and may be defined defined by an Object Object Snap point. A Linear Dimension must contain at least two dimension points. Variations ions to the defaul defaultt Dimension Point (DPPT) include the Dimension Dimension Variat Before/After Point (DPBA) and Dimension from 3D Point (DPOI).
Dimension Line
Dimension Points, usua An indi indicat catin ing g line line between between Dimension usuall lly y acco accompa mpani nied ed by Dimension Text defining identified measurement. The The Dimen mension Line may may be fur further defin fined by Terminators and representation i.e. colour and line style. Dimension Line Direction is implied by order of definition of the Dimension Points. Likewise the Dimension Text may be defined by representation properties angle, colour, font and height.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 176
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Projection Line
An indicating indicating line linking linking each Dimension Point to the Dimension Line at an Offset and Direction as defined by the user.
Projection tion Line Line Text can An accompanying Projec can be util utilis ised ed to indi indica cate te the the dimensioned element. This is aided by the use of Intelligent Text definitions whereby whereby the element element name is intrin intrinsic sically ally linked linked to the output text i.e. i.e. the annotation will reflect the element name regardless of any alterations in Model. The Overshoot property defines the distance the Projection Line extends past the Dimension Line and the Clearance property defines the start/trim of the Projection Projection Line to the Dimension Dimension Point. values sho shown wn in the dim dimens ension ion text are tak taken en dir direct ectly ly from the 3D Desi Design gn mod model. el. If the elements elements The values associated with the dimension points are moved in Model, the dimension can be updated automatically Update > Drawing > A nnota nnotation tion. by selecting Update There are three Linear Dimension modes: chained (orthogonal/aligned), baseline (left/right/aligned) and combined (left/right/aligned).
Chained
Baseline
Combined
11.2.1 11. 2.1
Creat Cr eating ing Line Linear ar Dim Dimen ensio sions ns
Before creating the Linear Dimension, the user should ensure the Current Owner is is defined in the Sheet (required View or Region) and, if appropriate, a suitable Visual Layer has been selected via the Active Properties form.
All Linear Dimension modes may be accessed via the Linear Dimension segmented button in the Annotate group of the Annotate and Home tabs. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 177
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Draw Power Power Whee Wheell may Alternatively, the Draw may be utilised to access the Annotate Power Wheel and, in turn, allow selection of common Linear Dimension modes.
On selection of the required Linear Dimension the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to specify the first Dimension Point of the dimension.
Contextual Editor At this point the Contextual menu offers the opportunity to renege on the curre current nt dimen dimensi sion on mode mode and and defi define ne an alte altern rnat ativ ive e Orientation, Direction, and Type or Position
Selecti Selecting ng the Type tile updates the Context Editor to prompt the user to select the required Linear Dimension type.
Selecting the Orientation tile updates the Context Editor to to prompt prompt the the user user to selec selectt a requi required red orient orientat atio ion n for for the the dimension.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 178
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Selecting the Direction tile updates the Context Editor to prom prompt pt the the user user to sele select ct a requ requir ired ed dire direct ctio ion n for for the the dimension.
Selecting the Position tile updates the Context Editor to prompt prompt the the user user to selec selectt before/after a model model element element (DPBA)
The first Dimension Point is defined by a click in the Draw Canvas on the required point (element) to be measured from.
Utilising Obje Object ct Snap Snappin ping g an elem elemen entt may may be sele select cted ed in the the Draw Canvas; for example filtering the pick to Element or P-Point P-Point – in addi additi tion on to feedb feedbac ack k thro throug ugh h the the curs curso or snap snap icon, con, the the sele select cted ed element is highlighted and named on positioning the cursor.
On creating the Dimension, the user may invoke the Draw Power Wheel via a rig right-cli click of the mou mouse combined with pressing the < Shift> key to restrict mouse selection to a specific Object Snap point.
On selection of the first Dimension Point, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to select a second Dimension Point. The selection process is repeated together with visual feedback feedback in the Draw Canvas indicating the relative position of the selected points.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 179
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 On selection of the second Dimension Point the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to specify the Dimension Line position by cursor pick in the Draw Canvas.
On defining the Dimension Line position position the Contextual Editor updates to prompt the definition of any additional Dimension Points.
Once the required dimension points have been defined, the Finish tile from the Contextual Editor or or the key is selected to complete the dimension.
below the single xplorer r below The Dimension and associated Dimension Points can be viewed in the Dr aw E xplore administrati admini strative ve LAYE element for the View.
11.1.12.1
Alternative Positioning Points
Dimensioning to before/after a a model model ele elemen mentt (DPBA) is possible on modifi modifica cati tion on of an exis existi ting ng Dimen Dimensi sion on via via the the Vertex Editor and altering the Dimension Point position to BEFORE or AFTER e.g. AFTER C1101/N13.
ommand and Window using using syntax: NEW LDIM followed by Alternatively, a DP BA can be created via the C omm FR B EFORE ID @ TO AFTER ID @ .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 180
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Dimensioning to a specific 3D position ( DPOI) is possible on modification of an existing Dimension via the Vertex Editor and altering the Dimension Point position to an explicit coordinate. can be created via the C omm using syntax: NEW LDIM followed by ommand and Window using Alternatively, a DPOI can
FR POS @ TO POS @ .
11.2.3 11. 2.3
Linear Lin ear Dim Dimens ension ion Mod Modifi ifica cation tion
As introduced earlier in the Chapter, the associated Vertex Properties Properties Grid and associated Vertex Editor facilitate an easy process to modify the properties of the Linear Dimension.
A property pr operty may m ay be altered by direct text input i nput such as Projection Projection Line Text…
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 181
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
…or by selection from an options list as found with Dimension Line Terminators
B y Style ) and the user By default a number of the Properties will reference the Dimension Visual Style ( By should be guarded in overriding these properties if consistency is to be ensured across drawings.
To modify linear dimensions graphically a series of dimension grips may be utilised in the Draw Canvas.
information on the use of genera generall Dimension Grips. Refer to Section 11.1.7 Dimension Grips for further information
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 182
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
11.3 11 .3
Refe Re fere renc nce e Gr Grid id Ann nnot otat atio ions ns
When a view is created that contains a reference grid within the drawlist, the view displays the reference grid annotations. annotations. A dimension dimension between between all grid planes planes and and labels labels for Rows and Columns, Columns, in addition addition for a projection projection view Elevation marks are placed. The appearance of the reference grid annotations are inherited from the View Visual Style which is pre-defined by the administrator. Reference Grid (REFGRD) elements may be added to a Drawlist and can be the sole element. When drawn they are finite in length and added in the same way as other 3D model elements. When When creat creatin ing g REFGR REFGRIDS IDS with within in model model,, a sett setting ing can can be appli applied ed whic which h links links a STRU STRU eleme element nt to its appropriate REFGRID , this is called GrdRef attribute. When this is set correctly the REFGRID linked to an added STRU will be automatically added to drawlist. Structural ral Modelling for more information information on REFGRID REFGRIDS S within model. Please see Model Utilities & Structu
A quick view is created with AREA01_EQUIP_SUPPORT_GRID , in PLAN NORTH and EAST ELEVATION .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 183
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The elevation view is created by changing the direction to EAST within the Directions options list
Within the Format 2D tab, in the Grids group, click Annotations to remove the grid annotations from all sides of the view. Repeat the command to display the grid annotations on all sides of the view.
The Annotations options list allows allows user to control which which side dims and which labels are displayed.. displayed..
Select from the Annotation options list to remove the grid annotations from the left side of the view. Repeat the command to display the grid annotations on the left side of the view.
Select from Annotation options list to remove the grid annotations from the right side of the view. Repeat the command to display the grid annotations on the right side of the view. process is used toggle Top & Bottom Annotations Annotations The exact same process
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 184
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
To update all reference grid annotations on the current sheet, in the Grid Annotations group, within the Update tab click Update and select Sheet from the options list. Existing Existing Modifications Modifications to the reference grid annotations annotations are retained.
There There is also also the the optio option n to choos choose e to upda update te for curre current nt owner.
To regenerate all reference grid annotations on the current sheet, in the Grid Annotations group, click Regenerate and select Sheet from the options list. The reference grid annotations are regenerated to match the 3D model. Existing Modifications to reference grid annotations are overwritten.
There is also the option to choose to regenerate for current owner.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 185
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
11. 1.4 4
Grid Pl Plan ane e Vie iew w
The Grid Plane view is an option available within the edit in 3D mode providing the drawlist has a REFGRID available. It sets the view to display a specified grid plane and all the 3D model elements that are associated with it The following describes the process in order to apply a Grid Plane view within the edit in 3D mode.
Sele Select ct a grid grid plan plane e via via the the 3D view view labe label. l. The The selected selected grid grid plane will be be highlighted highlighted in red. This will will activate the set view button within the Grid group of format 3D. Select the Set View button.
By default, section planes are created to remove unwanted unwanted elements elements from the view. Section planes can be modified to define the view.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 186
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Having accepted the changes the resultant view is shown here.
Forr mo more re in info forma rmati tion on on th the e vie view w vi visu sual al st styl yles es as asso soci ciat ated ed wi with th REF REFGR GRID IDS S pl plea ease se see Dra Draw w Fo Administration guide.
11.5 11. 5
Linear Lin ear Dim Dimens ension ion – A Wor Worke ked d Exa Exampl mple e
Display Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1. Before proceeding with the creation of a Linear Dimension, a bespoke Visual Layer is is required.
Click Click the Visual Layers button from the Project group of the Home tab to prompt the Visual Layers form.
Using the Visual Layers form, click the Create New Layer button button to add a Visual Layer to to the Sheet.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 187
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Activate the Name field by a double left-click of the mouse in the grid and rename the created Visual Layer Dimensions.
Click the Apply button and dismiss the Visual Layers form by clicking the Cancel button. The next preparatory task is to ensure an appropriate Dimension Visual Style is active for the Sheet to ensure adherence to a standard standard representation representation.. The required Visual Style is specified specified by navigating navigating to the Annotate tab and setting the style within the Active Visual Styles group. Select DIM-TRAINING fro from the the Dimension Visu Visual al Styl Style e options list.
Before Before creatin creating g the Linear Linear Dimensi Dimension, on, ensure ensure View AR View AREA EA 01 & ARE AREA A 03 (PLAN VIEW) is the Curren Currentt Owner Owner Dimensions has been selected via the Active Properties form. and the newly created Visual Layer Dimensions Remember ber that the Current Owner may may also be selected via the Dr aw P owe owerr Whee Wheell > Navig ato tor r or Remem graphically by a double-left click in the required area.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 188
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 Invoke Invoke the Draw Power Wheel with with a rightright-cli click ck of of the the mouse mouse in the Draw Canvas and and moti motion on to the the Annotate tile to prompt the secondary Annotate Power Wheel before releasing the mouse button.
With a second right-click of the mouse, motion to the Orthogonal Chained tile.
nearr Di me mens ns ion segmented button in the Annotate Alternatively the function may be accessed via the Li nea group of the Annotate and Home Home tabs.
On selection of the Lin Linear ear Dimen mension the Context Contextual ual Editor Editor upd upda ates to promp romptt the specification of the first Dimension Point for the dimension.
To focus on the area of the View to be dimensioned, prompt the Draw Power Wheel with a right-click and motion to the Zoom Window tile. Following the prompts, select the first and opposite corner of of the zoom window as shown below. below.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 189
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Draw Canvas updates to the zoom area.
Ensuring Object Snap is active in the Draw Status Bar , the first Dimension Point is defined by a click in the Draw Canvas on the required point (element) to be measured from.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 190
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
If required, the Draw Power Wheel, prompted by a right-click of the mouse combined with pressing the key, may be used to restrict selection to a specific Object Snap point. In this example the Dimensions will be created between Structural items. Sele Select ct the Item Objec Objectt Snap Snap so that the Dimens Dimension ion Point Point w wiill be attached hed to the structural item identified.
Structu ctura rall Colum Column n K1 as Select Stru as the fir first Dimension Point.
On selection of the first Dimension Point, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification of the second Dimension Point.
Repeat Repeat the select selection ion process process to select select Struct Structural ural Column Column K2 as the the seco second nd Dimension Point.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification of the Dimension Line position. By cursor pick in the Draw Canvas, select a position as shown below.
On defining the Dimension Line position position the Contextual Editor updates to prompt the definition of any additional Dimension Points.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 191
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Continue Dimensioning the Pipe Rack structural columns as shown below with the exception of Structural Column K7.
On defining the required dimension dimension points, points, select the Finish tile from the Contextual or press the key to complete Editor or the dimension.
Select the created Linear Dimension in the Draw Canvas and click the Dimension Position to alter the position of the Dimension line relative to the Dimension Points.
Note the appearance of the Dimen Dimension sion Point grips as being yellow yellow circles, thus indicating an intelligent intelligent connection point. Select the created Linear Dimension in the Draw Canvas and click the Dimension Addition grip (+ icon) to add a new Dimension Point for connection.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 192
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Select the omitted omitted Structural Column K7 .
Turning the focus to the Properties Grid, navigate to Projection ojection Line Type property and alter via the the Pr associated options list to 8004 Chained.
The alterin altering g of the Proj Project ection ion Line Type from By Style will result in the Visual Style Projection Line Type Ty pe no nott be bein ing g re refl flec ecte ted d in th thiis dim imen ensi sio on instance.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 193
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Projectio tion n Line Text and input Navi Navigat gate e to the prope property rty Projec input the intelligent text ~C#POS(C1:8).
Note: truncated truncated Position attribute attribute is used here to present Easting as an alternative to #POSE which reso re solv lves es to th the e Po Posi siti tion on En End d of th the e St Stru ruct ctur ural al Section.
Projecti ction on Line Line Text Text Just Justif ifica icati tion on to Alter the Proje Towards.
The created Linear Dimension now has a representation as follows.
Remember a Save Work can be achieved through , Remember , the Save button in the Quick Access Toolbar and via the Draw Power Wheel ( and right-click).
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 194
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Angular Dimensions
An Angular Dimension (ADIM) is defined by a sequence of Dimension arc arra arrang ngem emen entt and and is Dimension Points in an arc formed by the definition of the following Properties.
Dimension Position
Consid Considere ered d to be the centre or origin origin of the Dimension Dimension.. It is the point from from which the angular dimension directions will radiate.
Dimension Point
Define Defines s the element element to to be dimensio dimensioned ned and and may be define defined d by an Object Object Snap Snap point point.. An Angul Angular ar Dimen Dimensi sion on must must cont contai ain n at leas leastt two two dimen dimensi sion on point points. s.
Dimension Line
Dimension Points, usually An indica indicatin ting g arc betwee between n Dimension usually accompan accompanied ied by Dimension Text defining identified measurement. The The Dimen imensi sion on Line Line may may be furt furthe herr defi define ned d by Terminators and representation i.e. colour and line style. Dimension Line Sense is implied by order of definition of the Dimension Points. Likewise the Dimension Text may be defined by representation properties angle, angle, colour, colour, font and height. height.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 195
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Projection Line
An indicating line radiating from the Dimension Position to each Dimension Point, linking to the Dimension Line at an Offset and Direction as defined by the user. An accompanying Projecti utilis ised ed to indi indica cate te the the Projection on Line Text can be util dimensioned element. This is aided by the use of Intelligent Text definitions whereby the element name is intrinsically linked to the output text i.e. the annotat annotation ion will will reflect reflect the element element name regardles regardless s of any alterat alteration ions s in Model. The Overshoot property defines the distance the Projection Line extends past the Dimension Dimension Line.
values sho shown wn in the dim dimens ension ion text are tak taken en dir direct ectly ly from the 3D Desi Design gn mod model. el. If the elements elements The values associated with the dimension points are moved in Model, the dimension can be updated automatically by selecting Update Update > Drawing > A nnota nnotation tion.
There are three Angular Dimension modes: Chained, Combined and Baseline.
Chained
Baseline
Combined
Creating Angular Dimensions
Before Before creati creating ng the Angula Angularr Dimensi Dimension, on, the user user should should ensure the Current Owner is is defined in the Sheet (required View or Region) and, if appropriate, a suitable Visual Layer has been selected via the Active Properties form.
All Angular Dimension modes may be accessed via the Angular Dime segmented d button button in the Dimension nsion segmente Annotate group of the Annotate and Home tabs.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 196
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Alternatively, the Draw Power Wheel may be utilised to acce access ss the Anno Annotat tate e Power Power Wheel Wheel and, and, in turn, turn, allow selection selection of common Angular Dimension Dimension modes. modes.
On selection of the required Angular Dimension the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to specify the Dimension Position of the dimension.
Contextual Editor menu At this point the Contextual offe offers rs the the oppo opport rtun unit ity y to rene renege ge on the the curr curren entt dime dimens nsio ion n mode mode and and defi define ne an alternative Type.
Selecting the Type tile updates the Context Editor to to prompt the user to select the required Angular Dimension type.
The Dimension Position is defined by a click in the Draw Canvas at the required point (element) that is to be used as the centre point for the dimension. Utilising Object Snapping an element may be selected in the Draw Canvas; for example filtering the pick to Element or P-Point P-Point – feedback is provided through the cursor snap icon.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 197
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 On selection of the Dimension Position, the Contextual Editor updates to prompt the user to select a Dimension Point or Direction Direction. Sele Select ctin ing g the the Direction ti tile from the Contextual Contextual Editor menu menu allow allows s the the user user to defi define ne a dimen dimensi sion on dire directi ction on or sense sense i.e. i.e. Clockwise or Anticlockwise Anticlockwise. Howev owever er,, thi this step step is not not immed mmediiatel ately y necessary as the direction of the dimension is implied by the order of Dimension Point picks. Continuing with the location of a Dimension Point and utilising Object Snapping an an eleme element nt may be selec selecte ted d in the Draw Canvas. The selected element element is highlighted highlighted and named on positioning positioning the cursor.
On selection of the first Dimension Point, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to select a second Dimension Point. The selection process is repeated together with visual feedback in the Draw Canvas indicating the relative position position of the selected points.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 198
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Dynamic ic Hints may be used to indica indicate te the intended angle prior to selection. selection. Dynam On selection of the second Dimension Point the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to specify the Dimension Line Position by cursor pick in the Draw Canvas.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 199
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 On defining the Dimension Line position, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the definition of any additional Dimension Points.
On specif specifica icatio tion n of the required required dimensi dimension on points, points, the Finish tile from the Contextual or the key key is sele select cted ed to Editor or complete the dimension.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 200
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Dimension and associated Dimension Points can be seen in the Draw Explorer below the single administrati admini strative ve LAYE element for the View.
Angular Dimension Modification
As previously described, the Properties Properties Grid and associated Vertex Editor facilitate an easy process to modify the properties of the Angular Dimension.
To modify Angular Dimensions graphically a series of dimension grips may be utilised in the Draw Canvas.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 201
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
In addition to general dimension grips, an angular dimension has the following specific grip.
Dimension Position Grip Selection of the Dimension Position grip allows modification to the origin position of the Angular Dimension. The appearance of the grip is linked to whether the dimension is intelligently linked to the modelled element; crucial in ensuring the dimension reflects the current state of the model. A yellow circular grip indicates the Dimension Point has snapped to an intelligent object point such as a P-Point or Element. A blue square grip indicates the Dimension Point is not connected to a model element.
Refer to Section 11.1.7 Dimension Grips for further information on the use of general grips. Angular Dimension – A Worked Example Display Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1. Before proceeding proceeding with the creation creation of an Angular Dimension ensure an appropriate Dimension Visual Style is active for the Sheet to ensure adherence to a standard representation. The required required Visual Style is specified by naviga navigatin ting g to the Annotate tab and and sett setting ing the style within the Active Visual Styles group.
Select DIM-TRAINING from the Dimension Visual Style options list.
View Equipment C1101 - Detail is the Current Owner and Dimensions has Ensure the View Equipment and the Visual Layer Dimensions been selected as the Current Layer via via the Active Properties form.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 202
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Remember ber that the Current Owner may may also be selected via the Dr aw P owe owerr Whee Wheell > Navig ato tor r or Remem graphically by a double-left click in the required area. Invoke Invoke the Draw Power Wheel with with a rightright-cli click ck of of the the mouse mouse in the Draw Canvas and and moti motion on to the the Annotate tile to prompt the secondary Annotate Power Wheel before releasing the mouse button.
With a second right-click of the mouse, motion to the Angular Chained tile.
ula ar Dime Dimensi nsi on segmente Alt Altern ernati ativel vely y the function function may be acce accesse ssed d via the Ang ul segmented d but button ton in the A nno nnotat tate e group of the Annotate and Home Home tabs. On selection of the req require uired d Angul gular Dimension the Contextual Editor updates updates to promp promptt the the user user to spec specify ify the Dimension Position of the dimension. Ensuring Object Snap is active in the Draw Status Bar , the Dimension Position is defined by a click in the Draw Canvas on the required point (element) to be measured from.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 203
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
To restrict selection to a specific Object Snap point prompt the Draw Power Wheel by a right-click of the mouse combined with pressing the < Shift> key. In this this exam exampl ple e the the Dime Dimens nsio ions ns will will be crea create ted d betwee between n Nozzle Nozzles s relativ relative e to the owning owning Equipmen Equipmentt C1101.
Object Snap so that the Dimension Select the Owner Object Position Position will be attached to the centre of the equipment column C1101. In the Draw Canvas select the Equipment item C1101 as the first origin of the angular dimension.
On selection of the Dimension Position, the Contextual Editor updates to prompt the user to select a Dimension Point or Direction Direction.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 204
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Select P-P P-Point oint C1101/N4
for 0 fo
the Nozzle
Coincident points points can again be The Coincident used to select the correct snap
On selection of the first Dimension Point, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the selection of a second Dimension Point.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification of the Dimension Line position. By cursor pick in the Draw Canvas, select a position as shown below.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 205
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
On defining the required dimension point, select the Finish tile from the Contextual Editor or press the key to complete the dimension.
Select the created Angular Dimension Dimension in the Draw Canvas and click the Dimension Addition grip (+ icon) to add a new Dimension Point for connection. Select the Nozzle P-Point P0 of C1101/N10 then select Finish.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 206
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Using the Properties Grid navigate to the property Projection Line Text. Input the intelligent text:
~C NOZZ #NAME(P2:)(C2:). Usin Using g the Project Projection ion Line Text Justifi Justificat cation ion options options list set the justification justification to Towards.
The create created d Linear Linear Dimensi Dimension on now now has has a repr repres esen enta tati tion on as follows.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 207
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 To ensure the dimension can be clearly seen against the background graphic, Blanking and Gaps will be utilised. Select the created Angular Dimension and click the Gap button from the Annotate group of the Annotate tab.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification specification of the first gap point Select the Centre tile from the Contextual Editor menu. Using object snapping select the centre of a dimensioned Nozzle and extend the gap to the limits of the Nozzle.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to allow the user to continue creating gaps for the selected dimension; undo the previous gap definition or finish the command.
Continue to create gaps for the remaining two Nozzles as defined for the first Nozzle before finishing the command. To continue to improve the clarity of the View, blanking will be applied to the dimension.
Ensuring Ensuring the Dimension is selected, from the Annotate tab tab sele select ct the the Enable Blanking button from the Tools group.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 208
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Blanking Blanking is applied applied and the dimension/dimensi dimension/dimension on text is as shown below.
Select Zoom Extents from the Draw Power Wheel and Save Work. can be achieved through < Ctrl+S > , the Save button in the Quick Access Remember a Save Work can and via the Draw Power Wheel ( and right-click). Toolbar and
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 209
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
11.8 11 .8
Radi Ra dial al Dim imen ens sio ions ns
A Radial Dimension (RDIM ) is a form of Linear Dimension used to define the radius or diameter of a circular element. A Radial Dimension is not formed by Dimension Point eleme element nts, s, but is defi defined ned by a data databas base e refe referen rence ce to an element type i.e. the element to be dimensioned.
A Radial Dimension formed by the definition of the following Properties:
The properties properties shown in the above diagram diagram should now be famili familiar ar from the describ described ed properties properties for Angular and Linear Dimensions.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 210
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
A Radial Dimension can be defined as a Diameter or or Radius Radius dimension Dimension Line orientation. together with a Leader Line and/or Dimension
11.8.1 11. 8.1
Across Diameter
Diameter (with Leader Line)
Internal Radius
Radius (with Leader Line)
Creat Cr eating ing a Rad Radial ial Dim Dimen ensio sion n
Befor Before e creati creating ng the Radia Radiall Dimen Dimensi sion on,, the the user user should ensure the Current Owner is is defined in the Sheet (required View) and, if appropriate, a suitable Visual Visual Layer Layer has has been been sele select cted ed via via the Active Properties Form.
All Radial Dimension modes may be accessed via the Radial Dimension segmented button in the Annotate group of the Annotate and Home tabs.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 211
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
On selection of the required Radial Dimension a Select design object. prompt prompt is presen presented ted to Select The model object can be a significant element in the drawlist of a circular circular representation. representation.
On selection of the element to be dimensioned, the Radial Dimension is immediately created to a default orientation and representation.
below the single Dimension Points can be seen in the Draw E xplore xplorer r below The Dimension and associated Dimension administrative LA YE element element for the View.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 212
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
11.9 11 .9
Pitc Pi tch h Ci Circ rcle le Di Dime mens nsion ions s
Pitch Circle Circle Dimens Dimension ion (PDIM ) is a for A Pitch form of Radial dial Dimension used to define the radius or diameter between two specified points.
A Pitch Circle Dimension is defined by two Dimension Points and is formed by the setting of the following Properties:
A num number ber of the propertie properties s sho shown wn in the above diagram diagram should now be fami familia liarr fro from m the describe described d properties for Angular and Linear Dimensions. In a variation to the previously described Dimension Point, a Pitch Circle Dimension Point may be defined as:
RPPT
Radial Radial Dimension Dimension Point defined defined by a p-point/pp-point/p-line. line.
RPOI
Dimension Dimension to/from any given 3D position position..
The first first dimen dimensi sion on point point is loca locate ted d at the the centre centre of the the dimen dimensi sion on with with the the seco second nd point point defin definin ing g the circumference point of the dimension. A Radial Dimension can be defined as a Diameter or or Radius Radius dimension together with a Leader Line and/or Dimension Line orientation.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 213
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
11.9.1 11. 9.1
Acro cross Diame ameter
Diameter (wi (with Lea Leader der Line) ne)
Internal Radius
Radius (with Leader Line)
Creat Cr eating ing a Pit Pitch ch Cir Circle cle Dim Dimens ension ion
Before creating the Pitch Circle Dimension, the user should ensure the Current Owner is is defined in the Sheet (required View) and, if appropriate, a suitable Visual Layer has been selected via the Active Properties Form. All Pitch Circle Dimension modes may be accessed via the Pitch Circle Dimension segmented button in the Annotate group of the Annotate and Home tabs.
On selection of the required Pitch Circle Dimension the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to specify the first point of the dimension.
Contextual Editor menu At this point the Contextual offers the opportunity to renege on the current dimension selection and define an alternative Mode or Style Style.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 214
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Selecting the Mode tile updates the Contextual Editor to prom prompt pt the the user user to spec speciify the the requ requir ired ed Pitc Pitch h Circl ircle e Dimension mode: Radius or Diameter .
Selecting the Style tile updates updates the Contextual Contextual Editor to prompt prompt the the user user to spec specify ify the requi require red d Pitc Pitched hed Circ Circle le Dimension style: Dim Line, External or Leader Line. The latter two options annotate the element with either an internal internal or external external Dimension Leader Line.
Selecting the Design Item tile prompts the user to select a Design Design Item for dimensi dimensioni oning. ng. The dimensi dimensioni oning ng process process rev reverts erts to the the Radial process describ described ed Radial Dimens Dimension ion process previously.
Continuing Continuing selecting the first Dimension Point and utilising utilising Object Snapping, for example filtering the pick to Element or P-Point, P-Point, an element may be selected in the Draw Canvas – feedback is provided through the cursor snap icon.
On selection of the first Dimension Position, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to select a second Dimension Point together with visual feedback in the Draw Canvas indicating the relative position of the selected points.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 215
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
On selection of the second Dimension Point the dimension dimension is immediately immediately created.
The Dimension and associated Dimension Points can be seen in the Draw Explorer below the single administrati admini strative ve LAYE element for the View.
11.10
Dimension Dime nsion Refe Referenc rence e Chec Check k – A Work Worked ed Exam Example ple
The Model Reference Check facility is used to ensure annotation objects in the Sheet are associated with the model. This association is crucial in ensuring that the Drawing annotation continually reflects intended design.
Navigate to the Tools section of the Annotate tab and note the area defined in red.
The required annotation annotation to be checked is specified by the ticking of the appropriate Annotation Checkbox. In this instance, check the Dimensions checkbox.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 216
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 Navi Naviga gate te to the the Shee Sheett DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 and and focu focus s on the the prev previo ious usly ly dimensioned area of the View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH). tile. Following the Prompt the Draw Power Wheel with a right-click and motion to the Zoom Window tile.
opposite corner of prompts, select the first and and opposite of the zoom window as shown below.
Reference Check utility click the Model Ref. Check button To initiate the Model Reference in the Tools section of the Annotate tab.
The Drawing immediately ‘ greys out’ with dimensions not properly associated with the model highlighted as invalid ( red) and dimensions associated highlighted as valid ( green).
Remember ber that an intell intelligent igent association association with the Model is also indicated indicated by the Dimension Dimension Point grip Remem being a yellow circle. circle.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 217
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
To demo demons nstr trat ate e how how a dime dimens nsio ion n may may be invalid, select Dimension Point grip and move select a Dimension move to a free space in the Draw Canvas.
On placement the entire dimension immediately turns red to indicate indicate an invalid invalid connection point – note the grip changes shape/colour shape/colour on placement (blue square).
Reconnect the Dimension as previously defined and note the instant alteration in the Dimension being valid (green).
To dismiss the Model Reference Check utility click the Model Ref. Check button in the Tools section of the Annotate tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 218
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exerci Exe rcise se 9
Creati Cre ating ng Lin Linear ear Dim Dimens ension ions s
Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 and using the previous chapter as a guide dimension the drawing. drawing. Visual Layer is selected when dimensioning dimensioning the views. Ensure that the correct Visual For example:
View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) Create a set of dimensions across the centreline of all columns, and then dimension the equipment, locating locating from a column. Set the projection line style to Chained with the associated projection line text defining a centreline and equipment name. Apply Gaps and Blanking as required to aid clarity of view.
View FRACTIONATING COLUMN C1101 - NORTH ELEVEATION Create combined linear dimensions across the centreline of all the Nozzles plus a chained dimension projection line text for column geometry. Set the projection line style to Chained with the associated projection defining a centreline and nozzle name if appropriate.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 219
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B02/S1 and using the previous chapter as a guide dimension the drawing. For example:
View BUILDING B02 (PLAN NORTH) Utili tilise se the the Auto Automa mati tic c REFGRID an annotation. AREA02_BUILDNG_B02_GRID to Drawlist.
T his
can
be
achieved
by
adding
The resultant Plan view should look similar to above.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 220
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
View ROOF HANDRAIL & RUNG LADDER (EAST ELEVATION)
The Resultant Elevation view should look similar to above, change the annotation to the appropriate sides.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 221
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exercise Exer cise 10 Creati Creating ng Radial Radial & Angular Dimension Dimensions s Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 and dimension the two section views 114350mm to EL. 122962mm) and SECTION B-B (EL. created in the previous chapter: SECTION A-A (EL. 114350mm 100305mm to EL. 114320mm) using linear, angular angular and radial dimensions. dimensions. Visual Layer is selected when dimensioning dimensioning the views. Ensure that the correct Visual The Views should resemble the following. following.
Titles included for clarity. clarity. View Titles
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 222
CHAPTER 12 Label Annotation The following chapter describes the definition and use of label annotation in AVEVA E3D Draw.
12. 2.1 1
Labe La bell El Ele eme ment nt
Labels are a form of drawing annotation associated with model elements and comprise of text and/or graphics. Template AVEVA E3D Draw principally uses template labels, of which there are two variations; a General Template Label (GLAB) and a Symbolic Template Label (SLAB).
General Template Label
User User is able able to adapt adapt the label label conte content nt and and format format to a specifi specific c purpose. This may include the use of Intelligent Text to derive the label content from the model.
Symbolic Template Label
The label label is is formed by a pre-defined label template often containing a symbol and/or Intelligent Text for a specific purpose.
Labels can be attached to a model element and used to display any attribute of the element. Direct reference to the model data, combined with a simple update annotation operation, ensures the annotation reflects the current state of the 3D model. The user can control the format, content and appearance of the created label. Further to the ability to format the label and to ensure consistency consistency across drawings, drawings, the Draw Administrator Administrator is able to define suitable suitable project project defaults and an appropriate Visual Style.
Label Hierarchy Through the concept of the Current Owner, labels may be created for a View without a need to reference the Draw Explorer . The label label and associ associated ated connect connection ion point point are automatically placed beneath an administrative LAYE element as the View is labelled. As the below hierarchy illustrates, a label is defined by a Label Attachment Point (Design Data Name (DDNM) attribute) which defines the model element being referenced. In addition, a Symbolic Template Label references a Symbolic Template ( SYTM) through a Template Reference ( TMRF) attribute. The following diagram illustrates the Draw hierarchy in regards to label creation.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
223
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
LAYE
GLAB DDNM
LIBY
SLAB DDNM
LALB TMRF
TXTM
SYTM
LAYE LAYE
Admin dminis istr trat ativ ive e LAYE LAYE elem elemen entt
LIBY
Library
DDNM
Design Design Data Name
LALB
Label Library
TMRF
Template Reference
TXTM
Text Template
SYTM
System Template
Label Properties Design Data Name and is formed by the definition A Label La bel is initially defined by a Label Attachment Point or Design of a number number of Properti Properties. es. The forming forming proper propertie ties s vary between between label label formats formats and are descri described bed in the follow following ing sections. The foremost label properties are as follows.
Label Visual Style A Visual Style controls the representation representation of a label by the element adopting the preset properties of the style on creation or by modification. The use of a Visual Style ensures the consistency of annotation within the Sheet and across a series of Drawings. The properties of the Visual Style are determined by the Draw Administrator and any further alterations to the Label Visual Style are reflected in each instance the style has been referenced.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 224
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
TM-187 1870 0 AVE VA E veryt verything3D hing3D Refer to TM-
™
Draw A dm dminis inis tra tration tion for further information on the definition
of a Dimension Visual Style. The Visual Style may be specified prior to Label creation by setting the style within the Active Visual Styles group of the Annotate tab.
Visuall Styl Style e ma Alternatively, the Visua may be retrosp retrospect ective ively ly modifie modified d via the Properties Grid and Label Tools: Format tab. Note the Label Text properties, controlled by the Visual Style, are set to By Style to ensure the Visual Style is adopted.
Where a Label property has been explicitly explicitly altered from the defined Visual Style (By Style), the Label may be reset to adopt the Visual Style by clicking the Set to Defaults button on the Prope Propertie rtiess G rid .
12.2 12 .2
Labe La bell Cr Crea eati tion on
Current Owner is defi Before Before creatin creating g the Label, the user should should ensure the Current define ned d in the the Sheet Sheet and, if appropriate, a suitable Visual Layer has has been selected via the Active Properties form. On allo alloca cati ting ng a Visual Style, a Label annotation may be creat created ed via via the button in the Label bu group p of the the Annotate grou Annotate tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 225
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Alternatively, the Draw Draw Power Power Wheel Wheel may be utilised to access the Annotate Power Wheel and, in turn, allow allow selection selection of the Label tile.
Draw functions, the task may be initiated by direct As with with a num number ber of Draw command entry to the Draw Canvas . For example, to invoke the label function LABEL is typed with the cursor in the Draw Canvas .
On selecti selection on of the Label function for the first time in the Draw session, a Label Selection browser is presented for label template selection.
The Label Selectio Selection n bro browser wser initial initially ly opens at the lib library rary locatio location n as def define ined d by the User Default Default for Symbolic Labels Templates. prompting of the label function, function, the Label Selection browser is not prompted and the On the second prompting
C onte ontextual xtual Editor is is presented for the placement of a label using the previously defined Label Template. On selection of the required Label Library from the explorer area of the browser window, the display area of the browser updates to display thumbnail images of the contained Labels. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 226
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
On selection of the required Label template the Select button is clicked and the Label Selection browser is dismissed.
Where a General Label Template is required, the user must select select the General label template element from the explorer section of the browser before picking the General Label ( GLAB) object in the display area.
Continuing with a Symbolic Label Template; on selecting the required Label, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to specify the attachment point for the Label.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 227
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
At this point the Contextual Editor menu menu offers the opportunity to define an alternative Label via the Label Selection browser (Template) or copy an existing label in the Draw Canvas ( Sameas).
Copied and As an alternativ alternative e to the Sameas function, the Label may be directly Copied and Pasted in in the Draw Canvas . The Label attachment point is defined by a click in the Draw Canvas on the required point (element) to be labelled. Utilising Object Snapping an element may be selected in the Draw Canvas; for example filtering the pick to Item or P-Point. In additi addition on to feedb feedbac ack k thro through ugh the Object Snap icon, the selected cursor Object element is highlighted and named on positioning the cursor.
On creating the Label, the user may invoke the Draw Power Wheel via a right-click of the mouse combined with pressing the key to restrict restrict mouse selection to a specific Object Snap point.
On selection of the Label Attachment Point the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to specify the Origin of the Label by cursor pick in the Draw Canvas.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 228
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Prior to placement, the proposed label indicates the label content i.e. any defined intelligent text. On defining the Label position, the Label resolves in content and the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the definition of any additional Labels ( Attachment Point).
12.3 12 .3
Labe La bell To Tools ols:: Fo Form rmat at ta tab b
The Label Tools: Format tab is a context specific tab prompted on the creation or selection of a Label annotation.
Format tab containing the following grouped functionality. Label annotation is aided by the Label Tools: Format tab may be utilised to alter the label prior to and during the selection of the The Label Tools: Format tab and placement in Draw Canvas . Labell A tt Labe tta achment P oint and
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 229
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
12.3 12 .3.1 .1
Visu Vi sual al St Sty yle
The Visual Style group allows the definition and modification of the label Visual Style via an options list.
12.3.2
Text
The Text group group allows allows the Label representa entation tion to be define defined d and modifie modified, d, in terms terms of Colour , Label Text repres Alignment, Justification, Font, and Height from the available available options lists.
12.3.4
Leader
The Leader group group allows the definition of, and the modification to, the Label Leader Line representation representation by definition of the Leader Line and Terminator Visibility Visibility, Colour , Style, Shape and Clearance.
12.3.5
Frame
The Frame group group allows allows the defini definitio tion n of, and the the modific modificati ation on to, the Label representation on by definition definition Label Frame Frame representati of the Label Frame Visibility, Colour , Line Type, Rotation, and Blanking. And Frame Sides Visibility
12.3.6
Gaps
The Gaps group allows the definition and removal of gaps for the specified Label.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 230
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
12.4 12 .4
Labe La bell Mo Modi difi fica cati tion on
Draw allows the modification of a Label(s) through the use of the Label Tools: Format tab, the Properties Grid, and graphical manipulation in the Draw Canvas.
12.4 12 .4.1 .1
Prop Pr oper erti ties es Gr Grid id & La Labe bels ls
In addition to the Label Tools: Format Format tab, on selection of a Label it is possible to define the properties of the Label via the Properties Grid. The Properties Grid offers an efficient and quick user workflow to alter Label geometry, representation and visibility visibility by selection selection or direct entry.
: Symbolic Symbolic Label Template
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 231
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
: General Label Template
12.1.3.1 Intelligent Text For General Template Labels the Properties Grid allows the direct input of text for the definition of Label text. As previously described d escribed it is important to ensure intelligence throughout the drawing and the use of ‘free text’” is minimised - wherever possible, text should be derived from the Database. The concept of Intelligent Text allows the naming and referencing of element properties in the drawing and be assured that any changes to the model will be reflected in the Drawing. Modification to Label text is also possible by a double left-click on the identified text in the Draw Canvas and by entry to the prompted Text Editor and and ancillary Intelligent Text selector.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 232
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
presents ts further information on Intelligent Text, Text Symbols and Text Substrings. Substrings. A ppendi x D presen
12. 2.4. 4.2 2
Lab abe el Gr Grip ips s
As found with other Draw Draw elements a grip allows the graphical modification of the label properties. Common label grips are highlighted in the diagram below and outlined in the following descriptions.
Label Origin Grip Selection of the Label Origin grip allows modification to the Origin position of the label by positioning in the Draw Canvas.
Leader Line Connection Connection Grip Selection of the Leader Line Connection grip allows modification to the position of the Leader Line Connection point adjacent to the Label Text by positioning in the Draw Canvas
Attachment Point Grip Selection of the Attachment Point grip allows modification to the Attachment Point position and connection point. The appearance of the grip is linked to whether the dimension is intelligently linked to the modelled element; crucial in ensuring the dimension reflects the current state of the model.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 233
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 A yellow circular grip indicates the Dimension Point has snapped to an intelligent object point such Element. A blue square grip indicates the Dimension Point is not connected to a as a P-Point or Element model element.
Refer Ref er to 12.7 Label Reference Check for furt further her inf inform ormati ation on on asc ascerta ertaini ining ng whet whether her an annotation connection point is intelligent or non-intelligent.
Label Rotation Rotation Grip Select Selection ion of the Label Rotation grip grip cont control rols s the rota rotati tion on of the Label Label text text with with the the autom automat atic ic adjustment adjustment of the Leader L ine Connection point.
Leader Line Bend Grip Where a Leader Line has been defined as Bent, selection of the Leader Line Bend grip allows the addition of a Bend in the leader line to a required position.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 234
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Label Scale Grip Selection of one of the four Label Scale grips grips allows allows the rescali rescaling ng of the Label Label through through mouse selection.
Label Align
The Label Align tool allows user to horizontally or vertically align labels and text annotations. Using LEBEL’s position to reference. an existing placed TEXP or LEBEL’s
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 235
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
12.5 12. 5
Genera Gen erall Tem Templa plate te Lab Labels els – A Wor Worked ked Exa Exampl mple e
Display Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1. Before proceeding with the creation of a Label, a bespoke Visual Layer is is required.
Click Click the Visual Layers button from the Project group of the Home tab to prompt the Visual Layers form.
Using the Visual Layers form, click the Create New Layer button to add a to the Sheet. Visual Layer to Activate the Name field by a double left-click of the mouse in the grid and Label Annotation. rename the created Visual Layer Label
Click the Apply button and dismiss the Visual Layers form by clicking the Cancel button. The next preparatory task is to ensure an appropriate Label Visual Style is active for the Sheet to ensure adherence adherence to a standard standard representation. representation.
Visual Style Style is The requ requir ired ed Visual spec specif ifie ied d by navi navigat gatin ing g to the the Annotate tab tab and and sett settin ing g the the Active Visual Visual style style withi within n the the Active Styles group.
Select LAB-TRAINING from the Label Visual Style options list. Before creating the Label, ensure elevation View AREA View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (LOOKING NORTH) is the Current Owner and the Visual Layer Layer Label Annot Annotation ation has been the newly newly creat created ed Visual been sele select cted ed withi within n the the Active Properties.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 236
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
owerr Whee Wheell > Navig ato tor r or Remember ber that the Current Owner may may also be selected via the Dr aw P owe Remem graphically by a double-left click in the required area. Invoke Invoke the Draw Power Wheel with with a rightright-cli click ck of of the the mouse mouse in the Draw Canvas and and moti motion on to the the Annotate tile to prompt the secondary Annotate Power Wheel before releasing the mouse button.
With a second right-click of the mouse, motion to the Label tile.
Alternativel atively y the function may be accessed via the Label button in the Annotate group of the Annotate Altern tab. As this is the first selection of the Label function in the Draw session, session, a Label Selection browser is presented for label template selection. Select the General label template element from the explorer section of the browser before selection of the General Label ( GLAB) object in the display area.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 237
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Click Click the Select button button to confirm confirm selection, dism dismiiss the Label Selection browser and prompt the Contextual Editor .
Invoke the Draw Power Wheel via a right-click of the mouse mouse combine combined d with with pressin pressing g the key and Object Snap point. select Owner Object Select the Equipment Item EQUI D1201 and place the label as shown below.
Prompt the Text Editor form form with a double left mouse click on the Label Text and enter/select the Intelligent Text: #DESC #NAME(C2:) #POS .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 238
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
12.6 12. 6
(Symbo (Sy mbolic) lic) Te Templ mplate ate La Label bels s – A Wor Worked ked Ex Examp ample le
Before creating the Label, ensure View AREA and the View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) is the Current Owner and Label Annotation has been selected via the Active Properties newly created Visual Layer Label
Invoke Invoke the Draw Power Wheel with a right-click right-click of the mouse in the Draw Canvas and motion to the Annotate tile to prompt the secondary Annotate Power Wheel before releasing the mouse button. With a second right-click of the mouse, motion to the Label tile.
Due to label creation occurring earlier, the Label Selection browser is is not prompted and the Contextual Editor is is prompted.
From From the Contextual menu select select the Contextual Editor menu Template tile tile to rene renege ge on the the curr curren entt labe labell selection and define an alternative Label via the Label Selection browser .
TT/DRA/MA /MAS/LA S/LABELS BELS > LIBY LIBY TT/DRA TT/DRA/MA /MAS/ S/ Using Using the Select browse browserr explor explorer er naviga navigate te to REGI TT/DRA LABELS/GEN > LALB TT/DRA/MAS/LABELS/GEN/COL-NAME .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 239
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
From the display area of the Select browser, select the Template Label TT/DRA/MAS/LABELS Label TT/DRA/MAS/LABELS /GEN/COLNAME/COL-NUMT and click the Select button to dismiss the browser window . Ensuring Object Snap is active in the Draw Status Bar , the first Dimension Point is defined by a click in the Draw Canvas on the required point (element) to be measured from. If required, the Draw Power Wheel, prompted by a right-c right-clic lick k of the mouse mouse combin combined ed with with pressi pressing ng the key, may be used to restrict selection to a specific Object Snap point. In thi this exam exampl ple e the the Labe Labell will ill be crea create ted d for for a Structural item.
Object Snap Snap so that Select Select the Item Object that the the Label attached ed to the structu structural ral Attachment Point will be attach item identified
To focus on the area of the View to be labelled, prompt the Draw Power Wheel with a right-click and motion to the Zoom Window tile. Following the prompts, select the first and opposite corner of of the
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 240
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 zoom window as shown below.
Select Structural Column K1 as the Label Attachment Point.
On selection of the first Label Attachment Point, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification specification of the Label Connection Point.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 241
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Labell Tools Tools:: Forma Format tab Note Note the the Labe tab is avai availa labl ble e for for Labe Labell prop proper erty ty specification. Connection point as shown in the above diagram Prior to placing the Label Connection (end of Dimension Overshoot) modify the Leader Line Visibility to Off by clicking the Visibility toggle button in the Leader group group of the tab. On selection of the shown Label Connection point, the label is created and the text resolved. resolved.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 242
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 For th thos ose e el elem emen ents ts ha havin ving g pp-li line nes, s, th the e p-l p-line ine na name me to be at atta tach ched ed to ca can n be en enter tered ed in th the e PLINE property property For
Pos itio ition n. The distance along the section is defined as a proportion of the length; a value grid field below Pos roportion ion property field. less than 1 can be entered in the P roport If a view has significant structural elements within it and the user wishes to annotate to different Pline filters i.e. TOS, NA etc. the P-Line visibility attribute can be set at the VIEW level within properties grid
Modify the Scale of the created Label by initially altering with the Label Stretch Grips and then refining to Scale X 0.75 X 0.75, Scale Y 0.75 Y 0.75 using the Properties Grid. Using Copy and Paste functions, Copy the created label and Paste to the remaining Pipe Rack structural columns as shown below.
Save Work.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 243
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
12.7 12 .7
Aut utom omat atic ic Ta Tagg ggin ing g
The AVEVA E3D Draw Automatic Tagging facility enables the automatic generation of a series of Labels in one or more Views of a Sheet. This is facilitated having defined a set of rules to control which elements are to be labelled and the (common) appearance of the labels.
12.7 12 .7.1 .1
Labe La bels ls & Hi Hier erar arch chy y
The automatically generated Labels (which may be General or Symbol Template labels) can be individually edited, e.g. it may be necessary to reposition a label or to modify its leader line. The editing functionality is constrained constrained so as to prevent Labels diverting diverting from the criteria criteria under which the Autotagging Autotagging process operates. operates. The hierarchy for the creation of Tags is the same as found with Labels. Tags will only be placed below a LAYE element with a Purpose attribute set to TAG . If required, the Draw application automatically creates an additional additional LAYE element for the sole purpose of containing containing Autotagging generated Labels. Labels.
A Tag Rule ( TAGR) can be defined locally by the User or may exist as a standard Tags Rule created by the Draw Draw Adminis Administra trator tor.. The Tag Rule define defines s the model element elements s to be labell labelled ed and, and, through through a templat template e reference, how the label will label will displayed in appearance. Labels s created by Autotagging Autotagging may not be deleted individual individually. ly. If the Tag Rule is deleted or Unset, in the Label case of standard rule, the labels will be removed.
12.7 12 .7.2 .2
Crea Cr eati ting ng Ta Tags gs
The Autotagging utility may be accessed by clicking the Auto-Tag button in the Annotate group of the Annotate tab.
If a View is not currently selected, the Contextual Editor prompts prompts the user to Select Element i.e. selects an element in the View to be labelled. This enables Draw to select the correct view and, if required, automatically create a LAYE element for the storage of the Tags to be created.
The Automatic Tagging form is displayed. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 244
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Layer Layer optio options ns list list displ display ays s the the avai availa labl ble e LAYE LAYE elem elemen ents ts for for the the current View. Only LA LAYE YE el elem emen ents ts Wi With th a Only Purpose attribute set to T TA A G will be li liste sted d he here re (b (by y def defau ault lt on only ly one such Layer will be present, although others may be created if required).
The Automatic form has has Automatic Tagging form two parts:
Library Tagging.
Local Tagging.
A LAYE element may only contain one set of Library tags due to regeneration deleting any that may exist; losing losing any manual manual positi positioni oning ng or formatti formatting ng that that may have been undertak undertaken en with with previou previous s iterati iteration. on. It is possible to have more than one set of Local tags under a LAYE element. New LAYE elements can be created directly from the Automatic Tagging form as shown below.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 245
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
12.7.3
Library Tagging
Library Tagging use Tag Rules defined by the Draw Administrator. The Tag Rule Library, where the rules are stored, is displayed adjacent to the Ref. Library field on the Automatic Tagging form. This library is defined and may be altered through the User Defaults form.
The Tag Library options list enables the user to select the type type of mode modell elem elemen entt requ requir ired ed to be labe labell lled ed.. For For example Equipment, Piping and Structural items.
The Style options list enables the selection of a particular item item type type for taggin tagging. g. The availab available le options options are dependen dependentt on the option selected from the Tag Library list.
Clicking Clicking the Apply button button within within the Library Library Tagging Tagging area area of the Automatic Tagging form displays a confirmation message. Clicking Clicking the Yes button button will will delete delete any existi existing ng Tags Tags within within the current LAYE element. possible to create Local and Library Tags Tags beneath the same LAYE element. element. If an attempt is made It is not possible to create Library Tags beneath a LAYE element that contains local Tags an error is displayed. Clicking the Update button at the bottom of the Automatic Tagging form generates the tags (created as Symbolic Template Labels).
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 246
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The tags will be positioned using default position criteria; however, however, they may be re-positioned re-positioned using the Label Placement form or label label grips.
Refer to Section 12.8 Intelligent Label Placement for further information on the placement of Autotagging generated labels. automatically ly using the same default position. position. In some cases two or more tags may be positioned automatical
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 247
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
12.7.4 Loca Locall Tagging Tagging Local Tagging Tagging enables control over the appearance appearance and applicability applicability of tags. Tags may use a Library Symbolic Symbolic Label or a locally defined General Label as a template.
Copy Libr Library ary Sty Style le butto The Copy button n enab enable les s a Libr Librar ary y Tagg Taggiing sty style to be copi copied ed and and modif modific icat atio ions ns made made to the tag rule rule defin definin ing g which elements are to be tagged. Havi Having ng copi copied ed the the libr librar ary y sty style, le, the the Sty Style select selection ion in the Library Library Tagging Tagging area area of the form becomes unset. If the Style is unset on clicking the Copy Library Style button, no style will be copied. In the example here, selecting the Apply button alters the Rule name to NOZZLE-1.
A Tag Rule and Label Master (GLAB) (GLAB) are created created beneath beneath the LAYE element in the Draw hierarchy.
The Tag options list displays the item type to be tagged and the Rule option list displays the current tagging rules in the local style. To modify the rule that determines determines which elements elements will be tagged, it is necessary necessary to modify the selection selection criteria criteria in the with textbox. Template Ref shows the name of the Symbolic Label used for the tagging. tagging. This may also be changed The Template or a General Label created. As an alternative to copying a Library Tagging Style, new Local Tagging Rules may be created and stored under the LAYE element.
The Tag opti option ons s list list enabl enables es the selec selecti tion on of the elements type to be tagged.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 248
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Clicking Clicking the Create button creates a new rule name based on the type of element selected to be tagged, e.g. EQUIPMENT-1. Subsequ Subsequent ent creati creation on of a Local using the Local Tagging Tagging Rule Rule using same element type will increment the suffix of the rule name e.g. EQUIPMENT-2. The Delete button deletes the Local Tagging Rule displayed in the Rule options list. The With textbox enables the user to enter selection criteria to filter the selected element types using standard operands. For example if the selected element type is Valve an STYPE EQ ‘GATE’ AND ABORE GE 80 in the entry entry of STYPE With textbox would select only gate valves with a bore greater or equal to 80mm. The Template Type options list has two options:
Template Library Tagging
If Library is sele select cted ed from from the the Template Type option options s you can select select the browser browser button to select the template.
Once the desired template is selected from Template Ref will browser browser the Template will update update to suit.
Having defined the style and template required; clicking the Apply button followed by the Update button will generate the tags. The Regenerate All Tags checkbox will generate the tags using the current settings of either Library or Local Local Tagging.
Template Local Tagging Local is selected from the Template Type options list, the Attributes field displays four options If Local
Text Settings…
Text Contents Contents… …
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Frame… Leader Line…
www.aveva.com 249
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 These settings enable the specification of a General Label, using appropriate forms, to be the tag template. The template name is displayed adjacent to the Template Ref text. text.
In this example, Valves are being tagged and the text contents have have been been defined defined as the intell intellige igent nt text text #NAME.
Having defined the style and template required: clicking the Apply button followed by the Update button will generate generate the tags. The Regenerate button will generate the tags using the current settings of either Library or Local Tagging.
12.8 12. 8
Autot Au totagg agging ing (Lo (Loca call Ta Taggin gging) g) – A Wor Worked ked Exa Example mple
Ensu Ensure re the the Shee Sheett DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 is the the curr curre ent Shee Sheett with View EQUIPMENT C1101 - DETAIL as the Current Owner.
Label Annotation via the Active Properties form. Select the Visual Layer Label
Click the Auto-Tag button in the Annotate group of the Annotate tab and, on prompting, prompting, select the identified identified View.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 250
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Selecting Selecting the identified identified View, Draw automatically automatically creates a LAYE element with purpose Tag for the storage of the Tags to be created.
The Automatic Tagging form is displayed.
From the Library Tagging area of the form, select the Tag Library Equipment Library Equipment.
Style Nozzles. Select the associated Style Nozzles
From the Local Tagging area of the form click the Copy Library Style button to copy the selected Library Tagging definition and update the Local Tagging area of the form.
The proposed labels to be created will label connecting pipework to the Fractionating Column C1101. To this end, the with criteria must be altered to filter out those Nozzles that are not connected to pipework. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 251
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Append the With criteri criteria a to includ include e AND ATTRIB CREF NEQ Nulref . Click Click the Apply button button within within the Local Tagging area area of the the Automatic Tagging form. presented if the input input An error will be presented
with text is incorrect. A new Rule Nozzle-1 is automat automatica ically lly created.
A Local Template type is required.
Select Local from the Template Type options list to update the Attributes options list.
Contents… …Attributes option. Select the Text Contents
The Modify Text form is displayed.
Either enter the intelligent text #CREF(C2:) directly or select via the Intelligent Text form; displayed via the Intelligent Texts button. Click the Apply button and dismiss dismiss the form by clicking clicking the Cancel button.
the Text S et option n is populat populated ed by the current Visual ettings tings A tt ttribute ributess optio Visual Style. Note that the
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 252
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Clic Click k the the Apply butt button on in the the Local Tagging area of the form to confirm any chang changes es befor before e clicki clicking ng the the Update button.
The View View is updat updated ed with with gener generate ated d labels labels for those Nozzles Nozzles with connecting connecting pipework.
Save Work.
12.9 12 .9
Labe La bell Pl Pla ace ceme ment nt
The Label Placement utility helps to ‘tidy up’ crowded areas of labelling, labelling, minimising minimising Label overlap and leaderline crossing. As well as changing label positions this facility may also be used to change Label orientations, text justification, alignments, and the definition of leader-line shapes. The Label Placement utility may be accessed by clicking the Label Placement button in the Annotate group of the Annotate tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 253
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
12.9.1 12. 9.1
Intell Int ellige igent nt Lab Label el Pla Place cemen mentt For Form: m: Se Selec lectt
Remove labels to be placed within the drawing using a The Select area of the form allows the user to add or Remove spreading list.
The labels to be placed are selected by employing the following button options.
CE’s Labels: selects an individual label or all the labels in the current view.
Owner’s Labels: selects all the labels of the owner of the current element.
Clear : clears the current selection.
ID Label: allows the user to select a series of labels.
ID Design: allows the user to select a series of labels attached to the identified design element.
2D Window: allows the user to select all the labels within a cursor defined window.
List…: displays the Select List form. The user can select a pre-defined list or create a list for this activity.
12.9.2 12. 9.2
Intell Int ellige igent nt Lab Label el Pla Place cemen mentt For Form: m: Pos Positio ition n
Two positioning options are available for Labels: Remote or Local. The user must select the appropriate checkbox before clicking the Definition button adjacent to the checkbox options. A label definition form will be displayed.
12.10 12. 10
Remot Re mote e Lab Label el Pla Placem cement ent
Using this option will place labels around the view border. The Remote Label Placement form allows the user to set the positioning parameters for remote label spreading.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 254
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
labels ls may be spre spread ad arou around nd a recta rectangu ngula lar r Region: the labe region defined by the cursor. The co-ordinates of the region will will appe appear ar in the the X Y boxe boxes, s, from from where where they may be modified. the labe labels ls may be spre spread ad aroun around d a give given n View Margin: the margin of the current View boundary.
Minimum gap between labels: defines the minimum gap between the labels. Use: by default, all four sides of the View border will be used to spread the Labels, but one or more sides may be omitted. Automatic Orienta Automatic Orientation tion: allows allows or suppres suppresses ses automati automatic c rotation of the Labels at the top and bottom sides of the View boundary.
12.1 12 .10 0.1
Loc Lo cal La Labe bell Pla lace ceme men nt
Local Label Label Placem Placement ent form allows Using Using this this option option will place place labels labels around around signifi significan cantt design design element elements. s. The Local the user to define offsets that will be applied to the label with respect to the design elements.
The spre spread ad offset offset of the the labe labels ls from from thei theirr attac attachme hment nt point points s can can be specified directly by entry to the X Offset, Y Offset fields or indirectly using a Radius and an Angle. Selecting Selecting the Same checkbox will cause the entered value to be copied into the (Y Offset) textbox.
12.10.2 12.10 .2
Labell Place Labe Placement ment – A Worke Worked d Examp Example le
Ensu Ensure re the the Shee Sheett DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 is the the curr curre ent Shee Sheett with View and selection. EQUIPMENT C1101 - DETAIL a DETAIL a s the Current Owner and
Prompt the Label Placement form by clicking clicking the Label Placement button in the Annotate group of the Annotate tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 255
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Contextual Editor initially initially updates to prompt Select Element. Select a Label within the identified view. The Intelligent Label Placement form is displayed.
From the Select area of the form, select the Add radio button. Add all labels in the View by clicking the CE’s Labels button.
The Labels will be selected selected in canvas and highlighted with blue grips current selection.
Check the Remote checkbox and click the Definition… button to prompt the Remote Label Placement form. On checking the View Margin checkbox, define a View Margin of 5 mm. This will place the identified labels about the given margin of the current View boundary.
Ensure a Minimum gap between labels of 2 mm and that the T Top op, Left and Right view boundaries will be used by selection selection of the appropriate checkboxes. checkboxes. The Automatic Orientation checkbox should be un-checked. Click the Ok button to confirm the Remote Label Placement definition and dismiss the form by clicking the Cancel button. Click the Apply button on the Intelligent Label Placement form to confirm the changes and dismiss the form by clicking the Cancel button.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 256
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 The View is updated with the previously created labels by Autotagging arranged about the View boundary.
Save Work.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 257
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
12.11
Labell Refer Labe Reference ence Chec Check k – A Work Worked ed Exam Example ple
The Model Reference Check facility is used to ensure annotation objects in the Sheet are associated with the 3D model. This association is crucial in ensuring that the Drawing annotation continually reflects the intended design.
Navigate to the Tools section of the Annotate tab and note the area defined here.
The requ requir ired ed annot annotat atio ion n to be checke checked d is spec specifi ified ed by the the checki checking ng of the the appr appropr opria iate te Annotation Checkbox. In this instance, check the Labels checkbox. Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 and focus on the previously labelled area of the View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH).
Using mouse P an and Zoom navigate to the area of interest.
To initiate the Model Reference Check utility click the Model Ref. Check button in the Tools tab of the Annotate tab. The Drawin Drawing g immedia immediately tely ‘greys with dimensi dimensions ons not properly properly associated associated with the design design model model greys out’ with highlighted highlighted as invalid invalid ( red) and dimensions associated highlighted as valid ( green).
Remem Remember ber that an intell intelligent igent association association with the 3D Model is also indicated indicated by the Label Attachment Attachment Point grip being a yellow circle.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 258
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exercise Exer cise 11 Labe Labell Annotation Annotation Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 and using the previous chapter as a guide label the drawing. drawing. Visual Layer is selected when labelling labelling the views. Ensure that the correct Visual For example:
View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) Label column references as below (scaling the labels to 0.75).
Label equipment equipment items items in Views COLUMN C1101 SECTION C - C (LOOKING EAST) & AREA 01 & AREA 03 (LOOKING NORTH) .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 259
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B02/S1 and using the previous chapter as a guide add projection line text and manipulate labels to tidy all dimensions. Utilise Label Align.
The resultant view BUILDING B02 (PLAN NORTH) should look similar to below.
labelling grid lines ensure ensure the R el ela ative Pos ition property is set to Fal Falss e. When labelling
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 260
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exercise Exer cise 12 Autom Automatic atic Tagging Tagging Annotation Annotation Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 and, using the previous chapter as a guide, undertake the following tasks for the View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) . Visual Layer is selected when labelling labelling the views. Ensure that the correct Visual
Tag equipmen equipmentt items which which belong to the Zone ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 by using a Local Tagging Rule with suitable with criteria. Reposition the created labels locally using Intelligent Label Placement.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 261
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
This page is intentionally left blank
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 262
CHAPTER 13 Drawing Representation The following Chapter will examine the representation of Draw elements in greater detail.
As introduced earlier in the training, the Representation Styles group of the View: Format 2D tab allows the control of the View representation in the Draw Canvas through the definition of the View Type, Representation Style and Hatching Style.
13.1 13 .1
View Vi ew Re Repr pres esen enta tatio tion n St Styl yle e
The presented Representation Styles within the View: Format 2D tab are set by the User Defaults and usually defined by a Draw Administrator. The displayed Representation Library (RPLB) contains Representation Ruleset ( RRST) elements that are used to control the View representation of various Model elements. elements. This is achieved by the given Representation Representation Ruleset Ruleset containing containing Representation Rules that apply a referenced Style to a specified Model element type or name.
definition of the defaul defaultt Representation Representation Ruleset for the View may also be achiev achieved ed via the The definition
User and Limits Limits Defined View forms; forms; accessed from the Modify group group of the View: Format 2D tab.
13.2 13 .2
Loca Lo call Re Repr pres esen enta tati tion on Ru Rule les s
In addition to the general Representation Rules defined via the Representation Rulesets within the View: Format 2D tab, a Local Representation Representation Rule allows the user to apply a representation locally to a View in order to alter the representation of a Model design element. A created and applied Local Representation Rule is stored beneath the View the rule has been applied too. The order the Representation Rules are applied to the View is determined by a prioritised list. It is advisable advisable to locate any specific Representation Representation rules earlier earlier in the list.
epresenta resentation tion R ul uleset eset from the Local Representation Rules take precedence over any set R ep View: Format 2D tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
263
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
There are two methods to apply a Local Representation Rule:
Local Rules form A descriptive method to define a Representation Rule by element type or named element – the form is accessed via the View: Format 2D tab and Local Rules group.
Quick Representation & Hatching form A graphical method to define a Representation Rule via element selection – the form is accessed via the Home tab and Display group.
13.2.1 13. 2.1
Local Loc al Rul Rules es for form m – A Wor Worked ked Exa Exampl mple e
Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 and make View AREA 01 & and Current Selection. AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) the Current Owner and
Prom Prompt pt the the Loca form by cli clickin king the Locall Rule Rules s fo Representation button from the Local Rules group of the View: Format 2D tab.
The Local Rules form is displayed. Ensuring Ensuring the correct View is defined in the Views option options s list, list, create a new Representation Rule by selecting the button adjacen adjacentt to the Rules Create button area of the form. button n al allo lows ws th the e The Delete butto removal of existing Representation Rules
Local
The Create RRUL form is displayed .
Enter the Name: PLANNED-PUMPS-PHASE-02 .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 264
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Click the OK button to create the Rule.
Name. The elements for which the rule is to be applied may be specified by Element Type or Name
Element nt Type Type radio Select Selecting ing the Eleme butto utton n allo allow ws the the sel selecti ection on of an appropr appropriat iate e element element from the options options list.
Toggle the Names… option to allow the entering of named elements. Click the Modify button to prompt the Names form. The form allows the addition of multiple elements in a similar fashion to the Drawlist Manager form. form. Select the Pumps PMP-9, PMP-8 and PMP-7 from Zone ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA03 .
elements may be navigated navigated to in the Members list of the Names form by selection in the Model elements
Draw Canvas . Click the OK button to update the For list of the Local Rules form. If required, selection criteria may be set via the With text box e.g. MAT (ATTRIB FUNC OF ZONE, 'Equipment') NEQ 0. A pre-defined pre-d efined Style may be assigned to the Representation Rule by checking the Style checkbox and selecting selecting the required required style from the available Style Libraries. administered by the Draw Administrator Administrator and made available for selection The Style Libraries are administered via the User Defaults form.
Select the available Style for selection: /TT/DRA/PRJ/STYL/LOCAL. Select the contained contained Style /TT/DRA/PRJ/STYL/LOCAL/FUTURE Level 6.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 265
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 options list allows the toggling of the available Styles Styles to be described by Name, Gen, The Display options Pipe or Steel. This allows the user to observe the intended Style in regards to representation and properties. Click the Apply button and dismiss the form by clicking the Cancel button. The Representation Rule is created – note the change in the representation of the identified pumps in the Draw Canvas.
may be required. Upda ate Des Des ig n / C C urrent Owner Owner may An Upd
13.3 13. 3
Quick Qui ck Rep Repres resent entati ation on Rul Rules es – A Wor Worked ked Ex Exam ample ple
Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B02/S1 and make View ROOF HANDRAIL & RUNG LADDER (EAST ELEVATION) the Current Owner and and selection.
Rep. & Ha Hatc tch h From From the Home tab select the Rep. Rules button from the Display group.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 266
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Repre form is Represe sent ntati ation on and Hatch Hatch Rule Rules s form displayed and docked to the side of the Draw Canvas.
opening the form it may be necessary necessary When first opening to us use e th the e ho hori rizo zont ntal al fo form rm sp spli litt tter er bu butt tton on to minimize minimi ze the other docked forms.
In addition to the creation of a Representation Rule the Representation and Hatch Rules form allows the definition of a Style to be used.
Util Utilis isin ing g the the Rep. tab, create a new Rep. Rule Rules s ta Representation Style by clicking the Add button. Accept the default Name (may be modified on clicking the name in the Representation Style list). Ensure the created Style is highlighted by selection.
awing ing within the Drawing Library . The Representation Representation Style Style is create created d locally to the Dr aw
The Colour section on of the the form form allo allows ws the the Colour and Style Style secti specification of Line Type and Colour for the representation lines of the element i.e. Front Face and Back Face.
Expand the Front Face Style area and, from the Colour Purple Colour 12. options options list, select the Purple Colour Ensure the remaining Representation lines have a Line Type set to Off .
Representation Flags section of the form allows the user to control the display of the Tube, The Representation Pipe Symbols, Obstructions, Insulation, Profile (Steelwork) and, P-Lines (Steelwork). Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 267
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Uncheck all the flags with the exception of Profile.
The Representatio sectio ion n of the the form form allo allow ws the the user user to set set a cond condit itio ion n for for the the Representation n Rules sect Representation Rule.
No HLR ensures the rule is exempt from the hidden line removal process for the View. This is particularly useful to ensure Grid Lines persist regardless of View Type.
The checkin checking g of the Omission option is utilise utilised d to omit elements elements from a Representati Representation on Rule.
The Symbol option sets the symbolic representation for elements in the Draw Canvas. Ensure all checkboxes remain un-checked.
A style may be applied to an element in the Draw Canvas and thus create a Representation Rule by b y two m ethods: ethods:
On select selection ion of the Select Items button the user is prompted to apply the Select Items current (created) Representation Style to Model design items in the Draw Canvas View. The user may select multiple items and on pressing the < Enter > key, the Representation Style is applied to the selected item(s) and a Local Representation Rule created.
Select Owners The selection selection of the Select Owners button prompts a similar process to that described described for the Select Items method but with the condition that the item owner is selected for the application of the Representation Rule and Style. Click the Select Owners button.
The cursor in the Draw Canvas prompts Select design owner. With a left mouse click in the Draw Canvas select all Handrail elements including the Stair Handrail Handrail in the identified View. Note Note the the highl highlig ight htin ing g of the item item Owne Ownerr on selection. Complete the selection by pressing the < Enter > key. With automatic update, the Handrail elements are updated in representation.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 268
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
13.4 13. 4
Hatch Ha tching ing Re Repre presen senta tatio tion n Sty Style le
The presented Hatching Styles within the View: Format 2D tab are set by the User Defaults and usually defined by a Draw Administrator. The displayed Representation Library (RPLB) contains Hatching Ruleset (RRST) element elements s that that are used used to control control the View hatching hatching represent representati ation on of various various Model primitives primitives and indicate any sections that may be applied. This is achieved by the given Hatching Ruleset containing Hatching Rules that apply a referenced referenced Hatch Style to a specified Model element type or name.
The definition definition of the default Hatching Ruleset Ruleset for the View may also be achieved via the User and Limits Defined View forms; accessed from the Modify group group of the View: Format 2D tab.
13.4 13 .4.1 .1
Fill Fi ll St Sty yle les s
A Hatch Style is formed by a Hatch Pattern Colour and Fill Style plus Outline definition. In addition to forming the Hatching Style and Rule, the Fill Style may be used independently within the drawing to hatch an area of the drawing as part of the annotation. For example, a primitive (Outline) may be hatched by a Fill Type via the Properties Grid.
A pre-defined set of Fill Types (including solid-fill) is provided within Draw; it is also possible to utilise user-defined hatch patterns. (Type) is defined by one or more more hatch patterns. patterns. A hatch pattern can can be a sequence A Fill Style (Type) of parallel lines all drawn with a particular line style e.g. chained, or solid-thick, at a specified angle and separation.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 269
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Adding Hatching to a View – A Worked Example Navigate to the Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_ COLUMN-C1101/S1 and make the View SKIRT and selection. DETAIL (SECTION – LOOKING EAST) the Current Owner and
.
From From the the View: tab and Representation group, click click the the Hatching View: Format Format 2D tab Representation Styles Styles group, Hatching Styles Representation tion Library Library segm segmen ente ted d butt button on and and from from the the disp displa laye yed d opti option ons s list list sele select ct the the Representa TT/DRA/PRJ/HRUL/GEN and the Hatching Ruleset TT/DRA/PRJ/HRUL/GEN/Hatch-Equip Ruleset TT/DRA/PRJ/HRUL/GEN/Hatch-Equip.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 270
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Hatching selected d is desi designe gned d to hatch hatch Hatching Ruleset selecte a sectioned item of equipment. The identified View has such a section.
previously created cutting cutting list will force force the The previously plane to element.
section
only
the
C1101-SKIRT
The View is updated to indicate the placed section by a hatch and outline.
An Update Design may be required if A utomatic Update D es ig n is not active in the S tat tatus us bar. bar. Th The e Vi View ew is sh show own n wi with th LWT tu turne rned d on.
13.6 13 .6
Loca Lo call Ha Hatc tchi hing ng Ru Rule les s
As with Representation Rules, Hatching can be controlled con trolled using a Library L ibrary via the View: Format 2D tab or can be created Local to the View. The hatch can be applied to the View with or without a Section Plane being evident. The order the Hatching Rules are applied to the View is determined by a prioritised list. It is advisable to locate any specific Hatching rules earlier in the list.
epresenta resentation tion R ul uleset eset from the Local Representation Rules take precedence over any set R ep View: Format 2D tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 271
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 There are two methods to apply a Local Representation Rule:
Local Rules form A descriptive method to define a Hatching Rule by element type or named element – the form is accessed via the View: Format 2D tab and Local Rules group.
Quick Representation & Hatching form A graphical method to define a Hatching Rule via element selection – the form is accessed via the Home tab and Display group.
13.7 13 .7
Loca Lo call Rul Rules es Fo Form rm – A Wo Work rked ed Ex Exam ampl ple e
Navigate to the Sheet DRWGSLH_DETAIL-B02/S1 and make View BUILDING B02 - HAN HANDRAI RAIL & LADDER DETAIL the Current Owner and Selection.
Prompt the Local Rules form by clicking the Hatching button from the Local Rules group of the View: Format 2D tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 272
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Local Hatching Rules form is displayed. Ensuring the correct View is defined in the Views options list, create a new Hatching Rule by selecting the Create button adjacent to the Rules area of the form.
The Create HRUL form is displayed .
Enter the ROOF.
Name Name:: BUILDING-B02-
Click the OK button to create the Rule.
The Delete button allows the removal of existi existing ng Local Representation Representation Rules The elements for which the rule is to be applied may be specified by Element Type or Name Name.
Select the Element Type radio button and and from from the the opti option ons s list list sele select ct the the Walls & Floors sub-menu and Floor option.
If required, selection criteria may be set via the with text box e.g. MAT (ATTRIB FUNC OF ZONE, 'Equipment') NEQ 0. A pre-defined Style may be assigned to the Hatching Rule by selection from Style Libraries options list.
The Style Libraries are administered administered by the Draw Administrator Administrator and made available for selection via the User Defaults form. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 273
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 Select Select the availa available ble Style Style for selecti selection: on: /TT/DRA/PRJ/HSTYL/LOCAL and select select the contain contained ed Hatching Style /TT/DRA/PRJ/HSTYL/LOCAL/UserDef-40.
thumbnail allows the user to visualise the hatch pattern and colour. Di s pl pla ay thumbnail The adjacent Di Click the Attributes button below the Style selection selection area of the form to display the Hatching Rule Attributes form.
Using the form options enables the user to determine how the Hatching Rule Attributes are to be applied.
Clicki Clicking ng the Plot butt button on on the the Hatching Hatching Rule Attributes form Hatching Rules Rules form will ill open open the the Hatching Attributes Plot form, providing the user with useful illustrations of how the different settings impact on the resulting view.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 274
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
From the Consider options options list select all primitive surfaces and the All surfaces radio button button from the in all directions radio Hatching section of the form
Click the OK button on the Hatching Rule Attributes form followed by the Apply and Cancel buttons on the Local Hatching Rules form. Following an Update Design / Current Owner , the View updates to show Floor elements as hatched.
Labels and dimensions dimensions omitted omitted for clarity.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 275
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
13.8 13. 8
Quick Qui ck Hat Hatch ching ing Rul Rules es – A Wor Worke ked d Exa Exampl mple e
Naviga Navigate te to the Sheet Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1 and make make View View COLUMN and selection. C1101 SECTION (LOOKING EAST) the Current Owner and
From the Home tab select the Rep. & Hatch Rules button from the Display group.
The Representation and Hatch Rules form is displayed and docked to the side of the Draw Canvas.
In addition to the creation of a Representation Rule the Representation and Hatch Rules form allows the definition of a Style to be used.
Hatch Rules Rules tab, Hatching Style Utilising Utilising the Hatch tab, crea create te a new new Hatching by clicking the Add button. Accept the default Name (may be modified on clicking the name in the Hatching Style list). Ensure the created Style is highlighted by selection.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 276
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 Representation Style Style is create created d locally to the Dr aw awing ing within the Drawing Library . The Representation
Colour and Style Style secti The Colour section on of the form form allo allows ws the the specification of a Hatch and Outline Style.
Expand the Hatch Style area by clicking the expansion button. From From the Colour options options list select Red Colour 2 and from the Style options options list select 8007 SystemStyle 7.
Expand the Outline Style area and ensure the Outline has a Line Type set to Off .
From the Hatching Rules area, select the Only sectione sectioned d surfaces radio radio button button to Consider only only sectio sections ns in the identified View.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 277
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 As described for Representation Styles, a Hatching Style may be applied to an element in the Draw Item or Owner Owner . Canvas by selection of Item Click the Select Owners button.
The cursor in the Draw Canvas prompts Select design owner. With a left mouse click in the Draw Canvas select the sectioned Column C1101 and complete the selection by pressing the < Enter > key. The View is updated as follows:
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 278
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exerci Exe rcise se 13
Drawin Dra wing g Rep Repres resent entati ation on
Sheet DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B02/S1 and, using Chapter 13 as a guide, complete the Navigate to Sheet following tasks:
Representation Style for Using Using the previous previously ly created created Representation for the the Handrail elemen element, t, use use the the Representati Representation on and Hatch Rules form to apply the representation to all Handrail elements in the Sheet. Representation tion and Hatch Rules form, Using Using the Representa form, create create a new Represe Representa ntatio tion n Style Style to highlight the Rung Ladder within within each View.
For example, the representation of the Detail Views will be as follows:
Continuing with the Sheet DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B02/S1 complete the following task:
Use Use the the Local form to creat create e a Loca Locall Hatch Hatching ing Rule Rule for for the the Floor and and (Straight) Local Hatchi Hatching ng Rules Rules form Wall Wall elem elemen entt types types depi ROOF HAND HANDRA RAIL IL & RUNG RUNG LADD LADDER ER (EAST (EAST depict cted ed in View View ROOF ELEVATION).
For example, the representation of the View will be as follows:
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 279
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
This page is intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 280
CHAPTER 14 2D Drawing This chapter will introduce the Draw Region element; highlighting key element properties and outlining how the Region may be created and manipulated. The following sections will outline the drawing capabilities of AVEVA E3D Draw and how, through the use of a Region, the annotation may be incorporated within the Draw Sheet.
14.1 14 .1
Regi Re gion on El Elem emen entt
A Region is a type of View and defines a scaled area of the Drawing Sheet which can be used for drafting. A Region has a pre-defined, independent scale and can be created at any point in the drawing process. A Region is considered to be a Curren This defin definit itio ion n allow allows s the the user user,, throu through gh sele selecti ction on of the Regio Region, n, Currentt Owner Owner . This to complete an annotated drawing without reference to the Draw Explorer .
Owner , the rest of the drawing may be greyed out if required. When a R egion is selected as a C urrent Owner This is determined by selecting the Greyout button button from the Draw Status bar .
Region Creation A Region may be created through a variety of methods and from a hierarchical perspective the Region is owned by the Sheet. automatically y on The User must be at Sheet level or below before a Region can be created, this is done automaticall selecting selec ting a view creation method.
A Region may be created by clicking the Region button from the View group of the Home tab.
Alternatively, a Region may be created by typing the command REGION.
On clicking the Region button or tile the workflow begins with the definition of the Region size. The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the location of the first corner of of the proposed Region. On locating a position in the Draw Canvas, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification of the opposite corner .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
281
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Alternatively, on the first prompt, the user may click the Down Arrow button to display the Contextual Editor menu menu and the Centre tile option may be selected.
This updates the Contextual Editor to to prompt the user to specify the centre point of the View.
On sele selecti cting ng the the cent centre re poin pointt loca locati tion on,, the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to specify the width and height of the View through mouse manipulation or direct position entry to the Contextual Editor positon positon fields. Dynamic feedback is given in the Draw Canvas to indicate the proposed View.
The position position may be entered directly directly into the Contextual Editor . Navigation between fields and locking on entry is by key selection. selection. A field may also be locked and unlocked via key selection. selection.
Properties Grid & Visual Style
On creation creation and selection selection of a Region, as with with all standard standard Draw elements, it is possible to modify the properties of the Region via the Properties Grid. The Properties Grid offers an efficient and quick user workflow to alter View geometry, representation and visibility by selection or direct entry. entry. Sharing Sharing a number number of Proper Propertie ties s with with the View element, element, the Region may be defined by a Visual Style.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 282
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Region Manipulation - Grips In addition to direct entry to the Properties Grid , a Region may be manipulated graphically as per a View element by the use of Region Region Grips.
A View may be manipulated and modified through the following View Grips:
Stretch Grip Four grips allow the Region to be resized through mouse selection selection and movement or direct direct entry to the Contextual Editor .
Position Grip
A single grip at the centre of the Region allows the Region to be repositioned through mouse selection and movement or direct entry to the Contextual Editor .
Scale Grip Four grips at the centre of each Region side allow the User User to resca rescale le the View View to a defau default lt scale scale throu through gh mouse mouse selection.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 283
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Region Interaction - Draw Power Wheel A Region may be altered and manipulated through the use of the Draw Power Wheel and may be used in conjunction with Object Snap points.
On selecting the Region, the user may invoke the Draw Power Wheel via a right-click of the mouse and select actions such as Copy, Paste and Move. On selecting a Region grip, the User may invoke the Draw Power Wheel via a right-click of the mouse to confirm or cancel cancel an action or navigate the Draw Canvas. In addition, on selecting a Region grip and primitives within, the user may invo invoke ke the the Power Power Wheel Wheel via via a righ rightt-cli click ck of the mouse mouse combi combine ned d with pressin pressing g the key to restri restrict ct mouse mouse selecti selection on to a specifi specific c Object Snap point.
14.2
Draw tab
The Draw tab contains functionality relating to the creation, measurement and modification of 2D drawing elements. Drawing creation is aided by the Draw tab containing the following grouped functionality.
14. 4.2. 2.1 1
Mea easu sure re The Measure group group allows allows the measure measurement ment of Draw elements elements in linear linear (Distance) and angled ( Angle) directions. Any point in the Draw Canvas may be determined as to its position by use of the ID Point tool.
On use, measurement is indicated within the cursor tooltip, the Messages window window and, if active active,, the Draw Canvas dynamic hint feedback.
In order to display actual dimensions dimensions when using the distance command the user must ensure the identified View is the Current Owner.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 284
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
14.2.2
Draw The Draw group allows the definition of 2D primitives by varying methods. A number of these primitives will be utilised and described in the forthcoming Worked Example.
A number of the Draw primitives within the Draw group are are repl replic icat ated ed with within in the Draw Draw Power Power Whee Wheell on selecting the Draw tile.
Refer to Appendix E 2D Drawing Techniques for details on the purpose and use of the drawing tools contained within the Dr aw group. group. 14. 4.2. 2.3 3
Cons nstr tru uct
The Construct group allows the definition definition of construction construction lines: Ray Line and X Line.
As per the Draw Grid , construction lines are used to aid the drawing process.
It is advisable to place construction construction lines on a bespoke Visual Visual Layer so that they may be made invisible invisible as required. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 285
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 A Ray Line is defined by a start point in the Draw Canvas and a direction. The Ray Line is formed from the start point and terminated at the Sheet boundary in the defined direction.
An XLine terminates at the Sheet boundary in two directions on the definition of a point in the Draw Canvas and a direction.
XLine options options list list The specificati specification on of Direction may be aide aided d via via the the use use of the the XLine accessed accessed by clicking clicking the XLine segmented button.
Appendix ix E - 2D D raw rawing ing Technique Techniquess for details on the purpose and use of the drawing tools Refer to Append truct ct group. contained within the Cons tru group.
14.2.4
Modify The Modify group contains tools that may be utilised to modify 2D drawing elements. A numbe mber of these primi rimittives will be utilised sed and described described in the forthcoming Worked Example.
A number of the Draw modification tools within the Modify group are replicated within the Draw Power Wheel on selecting the Modify tile.
Refer to Appendix E 2D Drawing Techniques for details on the purpose and use of the drawing tools contained within the Modify group. group.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 286
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
14.3 14. 3
Regio Re gions ns & 2D Dra Drawin wing g – A Wo Worke rked d Exa Exampl mple e
The Worked Example and following Exercise will draw an example Base Plate detail using a number of the Draw functions contained within the Draw and Modify groups of the Draw tab. Navigate Navigate to Sheet DRWG-E3D-SLH_DETAIL-B02/S1 and ensure the Sheet is the Current Owner.
To create a Region click the Region button from the View group of the Home tab.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the location of the first corner of the Region in the Draw Canvas.
Position the cursor at the explicit position: X 490mm, Y 80mm Y 80mm and click the left mouse button.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the location of the opposite corner. Position the cursor at the relative position: X 525mm, Y 295mm Y 295mm and click the left mouse button.
On sele selecti cting ng the the seco second nd corn corner er of the the Regi Region on,, the the user user is prompted to specify the working Scale prior to 2D drafting. Specify a Scale 1:1 or 1 .
Propertie rtiess G rid . Note the Scale Scale may also be modified modified via the Prope The Region is created and shown as the Current Owner .
Note co-ordinate co-ordinate feedback feedback in the Status bar alters to reflect the Region co-ordinates rather than the Draw Canvas co-ordinates. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 287
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Continuing to use the Properties Grid, name the Region TYPICAL HANDRAIL BASE PLATE .
Before proceeding with the creation of the 2D drawing, a Visual Layer is is required for the Base Plate to be drawn and for any annotation.
Click the Visual Layers button from the Project group of the Home tab to prompt the Visual Layers form.
Using the Visual Layers form, click the Create New Layer button button to add two Visual Layers to the Sheet.
Activate the Name field by a double left-click of the mouse in the grid and rename the created Visual Layers Base Plate – Anno and Base Plate – Steelwork. For the Base Plate – Anno Visual Layer define the Layer Colour as as Red Colour Red Colour 2 and Layer Line Type as 8004 Chained from the respective options lists.
Click the Apply button and dismiss the Visual Layers form by clicking the Cancel button.
Before starting the drawing, ensure the Region is the Current Owner and and the newly created Visual Layer Base Plate – Steel Steelwork work has been selected.
owerr Whee Wheell > Navig ato tor r or Remem Remember ber that the Current Owner may may also be selected via the Dr aw P owe graphically by a double-left click in the required area.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 288
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 Invoke the Draw Power Wheel with a right-click of the mouse in the Draw Canvas and motion to the Draw tile to prompt the secondary Draw Power Wheel before releasing the mouse button.
With a second right-click of the mouse, motion to the Rectangle tile.
Altern Alternativel atively y the function may be accessed via the Rectangle segmented button in the Draw group group of the Dr aw tab. tab. The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the location of the first corner of of the proposed Rectangle.
Click the Down Arrow button to display the Contextual Editor menu menu and select the Centre tile option, or press the shortcut key.
This updates the Contextual Editor to to prompt the user to specify the centre point of the rectangle.
Positio tion the rectangl ngle X 390mm, Y 170mm Y 170mm.
at
the explicit position:
On selecting the centre point location, the Contextual E150ditor updates updates to prompt the user to specify the width and height of the recangle through mouse manipulation or direct position entry to the Contextual positon fields. Editor positon Dynamic Dynamic feedback is given in the Draw Canvas to indicate the proposed shape and size.
Specify a 75mm rectangle width and height to achieve a 75mm 75mm sq. sq. plate.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 289
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The rectangle is created within the Region as shown below.
The selection of a primitive shape, such as the created rectangle, prompts the appearance of Primitive grips. The grips may be used to manipulate the size, position and appearance of the primitive shape.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 290
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Select fil fillet grip and stretch tch downward to fil fillet corne rner of rectangle. Specify a fillet diameter of 10mm 10mm.
Alternatively, Alternatively, a fillet radius may be defin defined ed by alteri altering ng the Fillet Fillet radius radius field in the Properties Grid.
A series of centrelines will now be drawn for the Base Plate and Bolt Holes. Switch Switch the Current Current Visual Visual Layer Layer to: Base Plate-Anno.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 291
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
From From the the Draw Draw Powe Powerr Whee Wheell motion to the Draw tile and from the secondary Draw Power Wheel select the Line tile.
Ensuring Objec Objectt Snappi Snapping ng is active within the Status bar select the upper and lower mid-points of the rectangle to define a line.
Select the upper Stretch grips of the the crea create ted d Line Line and and stre stretch tch the the line Y 15mm Y 15mm. Repea Repeatt for the lowe lowerr Stretch Stretch grip grip by Y -15mm Y -15mm.
engthen n function may also be utilised to extend linear primitives. The L engthe primitives.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 292
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
From the Draw Power Wheel motion to the Modify tile tile and from from the the cont contex extt menu select Rotate The The user user is pro prompte mpted d in the the Draw Canvas for object selection. selection. Select the created vertical vertical centerline.
Contextuall Editor Editor update The Contextua updates s to prompt the specificatio specification n of the rotation base point. Usin Using g obje object ct snap snappi ping ng,, sele select ct the the centre of the rectangle or mid-point mid-point of the created line.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to requ reques estt the the spec specif ific icat atio ion n of a rotation angle. At this point select the Copy tile Contextual Editor menu. from the Contextual menu.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 293
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
degrees by Rota Rotate te the the line line 90 degrees sel selecti ection on of the the uppe upperr or low low rectangle edge mid-points. A second horizontal centre-line is created.
From From the the Modi Modify fy grou group p clic click k the Offset button.
Contextual Editor upda The Contextual update tes s to reque request st the the specification of an offset distance. Set an offset distance of 57mm 57mm.
Select Select the vertic vertical al centerline for offset.
The selected centre-line is highlighted and the Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the user to specify an offset direction. Click in the Draw Canvas to the right of the vertical centre-line.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 294
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The The offs offset et line line is crea create ted d and and the the updates to allow allow Contextual Contextual Editor updates further objects to be offset.
Continue Continue the offset process to form a centre-line centre-line arrangement arrangement as below. below.
Plate-Steelwo Steelwork rk Visual Layer from the Properties Having Having created created the centre centre-lin -line e annotat annotation ion;; select select the Base PlateGrid in preparation to create the plate bolt holes.
From the Draw Power Wheel motion to the Draw tile and from the secondary Draw Power Wheel select the Circle Centre-Radius tile.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 295
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Use the intersection Object Snap point to select the centre-line crossing in the top right corner of the base plate.
The Contextual Editor updates updates to request the specification specification of the circle radius. radius. Specify a 12mm diameter hole hole by entering 6mm radius radius. a 6mm
The creation of the remaining bolt holes at each corner centreline intersection is best achieved by the use of the Copy and Paste function. However, in the interest interest of introducing introducing functionality functionality an Array will be used.
From the Draw Power Wheel motion to the Modify tile and from the context menu select the Array tile. The Array form is displayed.
The Array form allows two types of Array to be created: Rectangular and Polar . Each type of array is represented by a tab in the Array form.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 296
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Rectangular Array Using a selected object, the Rectangular Rectangular array allows the formation of a rectangular arrangement arrangement of objects with a set number of columns and rows to a defined offset.
Polar Array Using a selected object, the Polar array allows the formation of a circular arrangement of objects about a centre point. The arrangement may be defined by a combination of number of required items, angle between items and total angle to fill. From the prompted Array form, navigate to the Rectangular tab and click the Select Objects button. Select the created bolt hole in the Draw Canvas and confirm selection by pressing the < Enter > key.
The Array form defines the Array by the setting of the number and offset of rows and columns.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 297
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Using the Array form set:
2 Rows at a -114mm offset.
2 Columns a -114mm offset.
Ensure the Array is as intended by clicking the Preview button. Click the OK button to apply the array
The Base Plate will now show four bolt holes at the corner intersections of the centrelines.
The next step is to create the Base Plate socket for the handrail post
Centre-Radius -Radius From From the Draw group group of the Draw tab, tab, click click the Circle Centre segmented button and select the Circle Centre-Diameter option. option.
Using the centre of the Base Plate as a reference point, create two circles of diameter 54mm and 60mm respectively respectively.. The Base Plate will now resemble the following.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 298
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
A series of dimensions dim ensions will now be drawn for the Base B ase Plate and Bolt Holes.
Current Visual Visual Layer Layer to Base Pla PlateteSwitch Switch the Current Anno and ensure the Dimension Visual Style is set to DIM-TRAINING.
Utilise Utilise a Pitched dimension Pitched Circle Circle Dimension Dimension to dimension the the inne innerr and and oute outerr diame diamete ters rs of the Base Base Plate Plate Socket.
Utilise a Pitched Circle Dimension to dimension a Bolt Hole and alter the Dimension Text to include TYP via the Properties Grid.
Use a Linear Orthogonal Chained Dimension to dimension the base plate edge.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 299
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Due to the dimension being non-intelligent, i.e. not connected to a design element, it is possible to rotate the created linear dimension. As described previously, motion to the Modify tile and from the secondary Modify Power Wheel select the Rotate tile. On being prompted for object selection, select the created Linear dimension and select the centre of the Base Plate as the rotation base point.
The Contextual update tes s to reque request st the the Contextual Editor upda specification of a rotation angle. At this point select the Copy tile from the Contextual Editor menu. menu.
Rotate the degrees.
dimen mension
90
A second vertical linear dimension is created.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 300
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The next step is to include a title for the Base Plate drawing. A title may be defined by using a Text Primitive. Ensuring the Current Visual Layer is set to Base Plate-Anno create a Text Primitive Primitive by clicking clicking the Text button from the Insert group of the Annotate.
ection ion 16.1 Text for for further information on the use and definition of text elements. Refer to S ect Place the text at the base of the created Base Plate drawing and enter the title PLAN VIEW into the Text Editor form. form. Alter the Text Height to 7mm and Text Justification to Centre. Click the OK button to confirm.
The title may be placed exactly through selection of the Text grip and, through object snapping, aligning with the Base Plate centerline. centerline. Ensure the Text Visual Style is defined as TEXT-TRAINING by selection in Active Visual Styles of the Annotate tab. Place a second Text Primitive near the bottom of the Region at its centre. On this occasion Intelligent Text will be utilised to ensure the text reflects the properties of the Region. Select the Intelligent Texts expansion button to display the Intelligent Text form.
Intelligent gent Text form Drawing opti From From the the Intelli option ons s list list sele select ct the the View/Region Title #VTITL and click the insert arrow button to place in the Text Editor .
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 301
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
On insertion, highlight the text and select the Underline button. To represent the Scale of the Region, enter the text Scale followed by one insertion of the Scale Num intelligent text & one insertion of the Scale Den from the Drawing options list of the Intelligent Text form. Modify the inserted Intelligent Text to: SCALE #VRAT[1]:#VRAT[2].
cale e Num and Scale Scale Den are the view scale Note S cal scales s numerat numerator or and denomi denominator nator respectively. respectively. Alter the Text Height to 7mm and Text Justification to Centre. Click the OK button to confirm. The finished worked example should resemble resemble the example below.
Exer Ex erci cise se 14
Regi Re gion ons s & 2D Dr Draw awin ing g
Continuing from the Worked Example, and using the created Region, draw a profile view of the Base Plate using a selection of primitives and draw tools. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 302
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 The drawing should resemble and be annotated as shown below.
The finished Region will now be as follows.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 303
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
This page is intentionally left blank
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 304
CHAPTER 15 Revision Management AVEVA E3D Draw allows the management of drawing versions by a Revision Control utility and, further, presents presents the opportunity opportunity to compare revisions revisions and highlight highlight any changes.
15.1 15 .1
Revi Re visi sion on Co Cont ntro roll
To add or edit a drawing revision, the Editor button button is clicked in the Revision group of the Manage tab.
The Revision Control form is displayed. The form lists all the existing revisions of the drawing sheet.
The form contains contains the following following buttons: buttons:
Display Revision This option allows the user to view, print and export the currently selected revision to a PDF file
Add New Revision This option creates a new revision and is marked by the addition of a new revision row to the form. Each revision is assigned the next letter in the alphabet as an identifier. The identifier may be altered on selection of the letter in the Revision column of the form. The revision automatically automatically inputs the identity of the user creating creating the revision revision and the current date.
Add New Text under Revision As required, this button may be employed to add detailed text, description and comment below a revision. The + icon adjacent to the revision revision row entry is used to expand and collapse any further information information below the revision.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
305
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Remove Selected Rows Used to delete the identified identified revision.
Refresh Snapshot A revision snapshot may be created on revision creation and is stored in the project database. A snapshot is used to compare one revision to another and may be refreshed for a given revision by clicking this button.
15.2 15. 2
Revis Re vision ion Co Compa mpare re & Hi Highli ghlight ghting ing Comparison between drawing versions is achieved by select selecting ing the Drawing Drawing version versions s for compari comparison son ( To: option options s list list and From: options options list) list) and clickin clicking g the Compare button in the Revision group of the Manage tab.
For example, take two versions of a Drawing Sheet: Revision A and Revision B.
Revision A
Revision B
The Revision group of the Manage tab may be used to compare the two Revisions by selection in the To: and From: options lists followed by the Compare button.
A comparison is made between the revisions and the Drawing updates to indicate additions to the Sheet in green and removals from the Sheet in red . The remainder of the sheet fades in context.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 306
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Contextual updates es to offer offer the the opport opportun unity ity to Contextual Editor updat Generate revision clouds or finish finish the comparison.
On confirming the generation of revision clouds, the sheet is updated thus.
The Cont Contex extua tuall Edito Editor r updates to prompt the user to click click inside inside those those revision clouds clouds not requir required ed or to Accept/Reje Reject ct All All via via the the menu. Contextual Editor menu.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 307
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
A rejected cloud is indicated by the cloud outline turning red.
On finishing the command the Drawing returns to full representation and a cloud is generated as requested with revision triangle and identifier. The revision annotation is placed into a new Visual Layer.
15.3 15 .3
Disp Di spla lay y Re Rev vis isio ion n
Previously created revisions can be viewed using the Display Revision button.
Withi Within n the the revision revision control control form selecting a revision from the the tabl table e will will indi indica cate te a blue blue highlight. Then select the Display Revision button.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 308
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Revision Viewer window allow allows s you you to view view,, prin printt and and export a revision to a PDF file. The sheet sheet name display displays s at at the the bott bottom om left, left, and and the curre current nt revision status displays at the bottom right.
15.4 15. 4
Revis Re vision ion Man Manage agemen mentt – A Wor Worke ked d Exa Exampl mple e
Navigate Navigate to Sheet DRWG-E3D-SLH_DETAIL-B02/S1.
Click the Editor button button from the Revision group of Revision Editor the Manage tab to promp promptt the the Revision form.
Create a Revision by clicki clicking ng the Create Revision button button and accep acceptt the creatio creation n of an associa associated ted snapshot.
For the created revision, complete the revision fields Date ( today’s date), Rev. By (trainee (trainee name) name) and Text E3D Draw Training. Click the Apply button and dismiss the form by clicking the OK button.
There is a requirement to alter the specification of Anchor Bolts for the Handrail Plate to a 10mm Diameter x 80mm Anchor Bolt.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 309
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 Ensure the Region TYPICAL HANDRAIL BASE PLATE is the Current Owner .
Invoke the Draw Power Wheel with a right-click of the mouse in the Draw Canvas and motion to the Modify tile to prompt the secondary Modify Power Wheel before releasing the mouse button. With a second right-click of the mouse, motion to the Stretch tile. The Contextual Editor updates to prompt the user to define an area in the Region to be stretched by specifying two opposite corners of a rectangle. Select an area in the Region as shown below.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 310
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Conte text xtua uall Edit Editor or The Con updates to prompt the specif specifica icatio tion n of a base point point for the Stretch. Select the base of the Anchor Bolt as shown here.
Enter a second base point at X from the the 0mm, Y -20mm from current position.
Adjust the Anchor Bolt labe labell to refl reflec ectt the the new new 80mm lengt length h by input input to the Text Editor .
The Region is updated as follows:
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 311
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Click the Editor button button from the Revision group of the Manage tab to promp promptt the the Revision Revision Editor form.
Create a second Revision by clicking the Create Revision button and accept the creation of an associated snapshot. For the created Revision B entry, complete the Revision (trainee name) name) and fields Date ( today’s date), Rev. By (trainee a nd Text Anchor Text Anchor Bolt Extension. Click the Apply button and dismiss the form by clicking the OK button.
Using Using the Revision grou group p of the the Manage tab tab compa compare re the the two two Revisions by selection in the To: and From: options lists followed by the Compare button.
The comparison illustrates the changes made to the Base Plate detail:
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 312
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Accept the generation of a Revision cloud by pressing the < Enter > key and finish the command by pressing pressing the key a second time.
has been created within the Vi s ua Vi s ua uall Layer Layer has uall Layers Layers form – R evision B . Note that a new Vi On Updating the Backing Sheet ( Update > General > the Revi Revisi sion ons s are are visi visibl ble e in the the Backing Bac king She Sheet et) the Revision Grid of the Sheet. Select Zoom Extents from the Draw Power Wheel and Save Work.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 313
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
This page is intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 314
CHAPTER 16 Finishing the Drawing As the training drawings near completion, t he following chapter will describe descr ibe the use of further annotation and utilities that may be utilised to finalise the Drawings.
16.1
Text
As introduced during the creation of the Base Plate Region and Drawing, Text may be inserted to the Sheet on selection of the Text button from the Insert group of the Annotate tab.
Text is placed directly into the Draw Canvas and utilises the Text Editor and and associated Intelligent Text forms to define content. For example, to define a View Title:
Text Visual Style A Visual Style may control the representation of Text by the element adopting the preset properties of the style on creation or by modification. The use of a Visual Style ensures the consistency of annotation within the Sheet and across a series of Drawings. The properties of the Visual Style are determined by the Draw Administrator and any furth further er alte altera rati tion ons s to the Text Text Visu Visual al Style Style are are refle reflect cted ed in each each insta instance nce the the style style has has been been referenced.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
315
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
TM-187 1870 0 AVE VA E veryt verything3D hing3D Refer to TM-
™
Draw A dm dminis inis tra tration tion for further information on the definition
of a Dimension Visual Style. The Visual Style may be specified prior to Text creation by setting the style within the Active Visual Style s group of the Annotate tab.
Alternatively, the Visual Style may be retrospectively modified via the Properties Grid. Note the Text properties, controlled by the Visual Style, are set to By Style to ensure the Visual Style is adopted.
Where a Text property has been explicitly explicitly altered from the defined Visual Visual Style (By Style), the Text may be reset to adopt the Visual Style by clicking the Set to Defaults button on the Prope Propertie rtiess G rid .
16.2 16 .2
Text Te xt – A Wo Work rked ed Ex Exam ampl ple e
Display Sheet DRWG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN-C1101/S1. Ensure View AREA 01 & AREA 03 (PLAN NORTH) is the Current Owner and the Visual Layer Label Annotation has been selected via the Active Properties form. Ensure the Text Visual Style is defined as TEXT-TRAINING by selection in the Active Visual Styles group of the Annotate tab.
Click Click the Text butto button n from from the the Insert grou group p of the the Annotate tab to insert text to the Sheet at the base of the identified View.
On this occasion Intelligent Text will be utilised to ensure the text reflects the properties of the View. From the Intelligent Text form Drawing options list select the View/Region Title #VTITL and click the insert arrow button to place in the Text Editor . On insertion, highlight the text and select the Underline button.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 316
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
To represent the Scale of the View, enter the text SCALE followed by the insertion insertion of the Scale Num & Scale Den intelligent text from the Drawing options list of the Intelligent Text form. Modify the inserted Intelligent Text to: SCALE #VRAT[1]:#VRAT[2] . Alter the Text Height to 7mm and Text Justification to Centre. Click the OK button to confirm.
Using the Copy and Paste function, copy the created Text and, in turn, make each View in the Sheet the Current Owner and Paste at a central base position. The intelligent text will resolve for each View.
16.3
Images
An image may be directly inserted to the Sheet on selection of the Image button from the Insert group of the Annotate tab.
On selection of the Image button, an image may be navigated to and selected via an Open browser. The image is positioned directly in the Draw Canvas and may be resized and rotated as required prior to confir confirmati mation on of placeme placement. nt. On placeme placement, nt, the image image may be further further modifie modified d by Image grips: Stretch, Position and Rotate.
An image has a unique Background property which may be utilised to underlay an image to the design graphic. For example, this property may be used to overlay a layout design on a site survey or map.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 317
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
16.3 16 .3.1 .1
Imag Im ages es – A Wo Work rked ed Ex Exam ampl ple e
Sheet DRWG-FRACTIO DRWG-FRACTIONATIN NATING_COLUMN G_COLUMN-Ensu Ensuri ring ng the the Sheet C1101/S1 is the current owner; click the Image button from the Insert group of the Annotate tab to prompt the Open browser.
AREA EA 01 Navigate to C:\AVEVA\Plant\E3DTraining\Training\userdata\Draw and and sele select ct the Image Image (Bitmap) (Bitmap) AR & AREA 03 Image .
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification of the centre point location for the image.
Position the image at the Draw Canvas position X 840mm X 840mm, Y 150mm Y 150mm. The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification of the image Scale. Specify a scale 1:1 and press the key. The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification of the image Rotation.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 318
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Specify Specify a 0 degre degree e angle angle and and pres press s the the key.
The image is placed as follows and completed with inserted Text title ( AREA 01 & AREA 03 IMAGE ).
16.4
Symbols
A Symbol may be directly inserted to the Sheet on selection of the Symbol button from the Insert group of the Annotate tab.
Symbol selection is made via a Select browser.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 319
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The chosen symbol is then placed and scaled as required in to the Draw Canvas.
Contextual Editor On selection of the Symbol the Contextual menu allows allows the selecti selection on of an alterna alternativ tive e symbol symbol template and the scaling of the current selection.
On placement in the Draw Canvas, the Symbol may be modified in position, position, scale scale Symbol grips: Scale, Position and Rotate. and rotation by the use of Symbol
Details and blocks from ACAD .dxf can be imported into appropriate SYMBOL libraries please see refer to TM-1870 AVEVA Everything3D™ Draw Administration Administration for furthe furtherr informa information tion CAD Import tool.
16.5 16 .5
Tabl Ta ble e & Ex Exce cell Im Impo port rt
A Table may be directly inserted to the Sheet on selection of the Table button from the Insert group of the Annotate tab.
Alternatively, an Excel Table may be inserted to the Sheet on selection of the Excel button from the Import group of the Tools tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 320
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
16.5.1 16. 5.1
Excel Ex cel Imp Import ort – A Wor Worked ked Ex Examp ample le
Click the Excel button from the Import group of the Tools tab to prompt the Open browser.
Navigate to C:\AVEVA\Plant\E3DTraining\Training\userdata\Draw and select the Excel document C1101 Spec (E3D Draw Training).
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification of the centre point location for the Excel table.
Position the Excel table at the Draw Canvas position X 530mm X 530mm, Y 150mm Y 150mm. The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification of the Excel table Scale.
Specify scale at 1:1
The Contextual Editor updates updates to prompt the specification of the Excel table Rotation. Specify Specify a 0 degree angle and press the < Enter > key. The Excel Excel table table is placed placed as foll follows ows and complet completed ed with with insert inserted ed Text title title ( C1101 VESSEL SPECIFICATION ).
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 321
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Doub Double le cli clicki cking on the the Excel will open EXCEL for frame wi modification of the spreadsheet.
Changes can can be mad made and if Saved will update within canvas.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 322
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
16.6
Overlays
An Overlay may be inserted to the Sheet on selection of the Overlay button from the Insert group of the Annotate tab.
modification to the overlay is reflected in the Drawing. Drawing. Any modification
16.7 16 .7
Over Ov erla lay ys – A Wo Work rked ed Ex Exam ample ple
Navigate to the Drawing Sheet DRWG-SLH_DETAIL-B02/TRA.
Click the Overlay button from the Insert group of the Annotate tab.
On first selection, the user is prompted to select a required Overlay from the Open Overlay Sheet browser. Select TT TT/DRA/PRJ/OVERS/MET/TRA-KEY /DRA/PRJ/OVERS/MET/TRA-KEYPLAN PLAN and click the Open button.
On selection selection the Contextual Contextual Editor updates to prompt the user user spec specif ify y an insertion position in in the Draw Canvas.
If required, the Scale button may be selected from the Contextual Editor menu menu to alter the scale/size of the used overlay – this is particularly useful where the overlay has been designed to be generic across differing Backing Sheets.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 323
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The Overlay inserted here has been designed for the AVEVA A0 Backing Sheet . Insert the Overlay by clicking the bottom left corner of the sheet – note that a preview of the Overlay image should reside in the Keyplan area of the Backing Sheet.
On selection, the Backing Sheet is populated as shown here.
Overlay purposes can be set to display certain design graphics on different layers, this layer visibility can be controlled with thin properties grid as shown below.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 324
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
TM-187 1870 0 AVE VA E veryt verything3D hing3D Refer to TM-
™
Draw A dm dminis inis tra tration tion for further information on the definition
and control of OLAY elements.
16.8 16 .8
Powe Po werr Se Sele lect ctor or
Within Within Draw there are many ways to select select elements elements graphi graphicall cally y in the canvas. canvas. Sometimes Sometimes though though,, the select selection ion requiremen requirements ts may not be quite quite so simple. simple. The PowerSe PowerSelec lector tor tool tool enables enables the user user to create create selection sets by applying filters & building database style queries that can make complex selections really quick and accurate. The Power Selector can be used to select Draw Primitives & Annotations to then populate the Properties Selector can Grid. Modifications globally to common attributes can then be made. The following steps demonstrate how to apply basic filter selections within the draw canvas.
The Power Selector button button is located within the Display group of the Home tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 325
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Powerr Sele Select ctor or Form Form On open openin ing g the the Powe Primitive or Annotation elem elemen ents ts are are available available from the the Sel Select ect Enti Entity ty Gro Group up options list.
The Select Entity Source options list controls the search source. If All is select selected ed this this will will perfo perform rm a filt filter er acros across s all all eleme element nts s on the the current sheet. If Current Owner is selected the search will perform a filter across only the current owner.
Quick Sel Select ect butt Selecting Quick button on filt filters ers the the selection of all elements that match a picked element. You are prompted to Select entity Selecting an element in canvas automatically fills fills filter filter fields fields populat populated ed with with the element elements s properties.
Select is also available available on each filter Quick Select
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 326
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Selecting Primitive from from the options options list list will will allow selection of primitive elements using primitive filter criteria
Selecting the Select Primitives will display an option options s list list of all Primitive Primitive Types to choose choose from.
Selecting the Zoom to selection button will form a zoom area to the extents of the selection set
Selecting the Add to collect This will will force force element elements s that match match the filter filter collections ions butt button on This criteria, criteria, into the collections collections form.
A co coll llec ecti tion on wi will ll need to be al alrea ready dy cr crea eate ted d & se sett to ac acti tive ve to ena enable ble this function. Refer to Collections within foundations guide for further information.
search rch cri criter teria ia will Selecting Selecting the New sea will remov remove e curre current nt filt filters ers and and star startt a new search...
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 327
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Using the select primitives options list select ALL. The selection criteria is dynamic and will select all primitives within the canvas as shown here.
The Properties Grid is updated with the current selection set .This enables the user to perform modifications to the selected elements.
Only y att attrib ributes utes which which are common to all Onl elements are shown within the properties grid
Having selected a primitive type property filters can be applied. The user can apply numerous filters.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 328
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Filter operator are available for appropriate elements. Using the options list the user can select :Equals Not Equal Begins with Ends with Contains Does not contain
Selecting Annotation from the options list will Labels or allow selection selection of either Labels Dimensions, chosen by the tab.
Having Having selected selected an Annotation Annotation type, property filters can be applied. The user can again apply numerous filter.
PML filter expressions can be used. The expres expressio sion n here here would would return return all labels labels intelligently connected to PIPE elements with a bore greater than 100mm.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 329
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
16.9 16. 9
Power Po wer Se Selec lector tor– – A Wor Worke ked d Exa Exampl mple e
This Worked Example will use the Power Selector to to select labels within the sheet, and applying a complex rule to select labels within the draw canvas. Navigate to DRWAG-FRACTIONATING_COLUMN –C1101/S1.
EQUIPM PMEN ENT T C110 C1101 1 – Make EQUI Detail view the current owner.
Power Selec Selector tor button Select Power with within in the displ display ay group group home home tab.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 330
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Select Current Owner from from the Select Entity Source options list
This wil willl per perform form a sea search rch results on only that view
Select Annotation fro from m the the Select Entity Group options list.
Select Labels tab
Select Element Type & Nozzles from from the propert property y filter filter option options s lists.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 331
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The dynamic selection will active the grips on the all labels connected to nozzles
Within the WITH field enter
P1BOR GT 100
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 332
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The W ITH expressio expression n used used will will retu return rn the sele selecti ction on set for all all labels connection to nozzles with A BOR greater than100mm diameter.
The resu result ltan antt selec selected ted label labels s indicated this.
Tur Turn the label visibility off throu through gh the the Label Label Visabil Visability ity drop drop-d -dow own n list list loca locate ted d in the the Properties Grid. This This has has now now remo remove ved d thos those e labels labels from the View.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 333
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The resultant view will look similar to below.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 334
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exerci Exe rcise se 15
Finish Fin ishing ing the the Trai Trainin ning g Drawin Drawings gs
Naviga Navigate te to and complet complete e (if require required) d) the Drawings Drawings DRWG-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 & Drawing Drawing DRWGSLH_DETAIL-B02. The below are suggested ideas.
Add a north north arrow symbol. (Project > TT/Project_Libraries > TT/Project_Symbols > TT/Project_Symbols/General)
Ensure all Dimensions Dimensions and Elevation Elevations s are in place. place.
Utilise Labels annotation for all Views – reference labelled item properties using Intelligent Text.
Add addition additional al 2D Symbols Symbols and Drawing Drawing elements elements e.g. Frame the Rung Rung Ladder Ladder Detail Detail View area.
Ensure all Views have have an intelligent intelligent View Title & Scale. Scale.
Add a Drawing Drawing note:
Create and and insert an appropriate appropriate Excel Excel Spread sheet sheet to the Rung Ladder Detail. Detail.
Reference Check. Complete Complete a Model Reference
Create a new Revision Revision with with text: text: Training Complete.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 335
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 336
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 337
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
This page is intentionally left blank
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 338
CHAPTER 17 Drawing Export The following chapter describes the various facilities available for exporting drawings from AVEVA E3D Draw.
17. 7.1 1
Pro roje jec ct Me Menu nu
Export from AVEVA E3D Draw is performed via the Project area of the application. Selecting the Export option displays an Export and Settings area together with a Preview window.
The defin defined ed expor exportt may be a singl single e Draw Draw Sheet Sheet (Export) or multipl multiple e Drawing Drawing Sheets Sheets (Multi Export).
Clicking the Multi Export button prompts the Open browser. The browser allows the navigation and selection of multiple sheets from the Draw hierarchy.
The key may be used to select multiple sheets in the Open browser.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
339
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Within the Export area there are a a number of export formats available:
Export to PDF
Export to DGN
Export to DXF/DWG
Export to Plot File
Export to PNG/JPEG/TIFF/BMP/GIF
Export to SVG/AVEVA.NET .
The Settings area allows the user to set preferences and settings for the each export format type. The export formats and associated settings will be explained in greater detail in the sections that follow.
17.2 Export to PDF Selecting the Export to PDF option from the Export options list alters the export area to display PDF specific specific settings. settings. The Plot Style options options list list display displays s availa available ble styles styles to be applied to the PDF image. Default plot styles available include the following.
All-Filltypes-as-Solid
All-Line types-as-Solid
Default
Greyscale
Monochrome
Refer to Secton 18.2 Plot Styles for further information on the use of user defined plot styles. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 340
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The subsequent subsequent Settings options list allows the selection of the Sheet area to be exported. The following options are available.
Display Exports the currently displayed area of the Sheet. Extents Exports the extents of the current Sheet. Window Expo Export rts s a speci specifi fied ed area area of the Sheet Sheet through cursor selection in the Draw Canvas. Sheet Exports the entire Sheet.
The remaining Settings options influence the export orientation orientation and size.
If the Fit to paper checkbox checkbox is unchecked the user is able to define a custom scale via the two textboxes. The Orientation options list allows a choice of Landscape Landscape Orientation with or Portrait Orientation with pape paperr size size defi defined ned by the the subsequent options list. The Origin Offset setting allows the exported area to be centred at the paper centre or at an explicit position. The General setti setting ngs s checkb checkbox oxes es allo allow, w, in turn, turn, the the definition of Scale line weight, Auto preview and Show view frames. Clicking Clicking the Preview button, button, or where where Auto preview is applied, populates the preview area of the Export page with the intended export.
On defining the required settings, the Export button is clicked and a save file location chosen. On saving, the exported exported file will then be opened and displayed automatically. automatically.
xport rt and Multi Export buttons When the E xpo and Multi buttons are pressed, the current export settings are saved.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 341
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
17.3 Export to DGN Selecting the Export to DGN option from the Export options list alters the export area to display DGN specific settings.
The Settings area allows, via an options list, selection of an approp appropria riate te file file format format to ensure ensure compati compatibili bility ty with the intended export software.
The user may, via a Settings options list, define the required export area. The opti option on list list detai details ls and prev previe iews ws the the identi identifie fied d and consti constituen tuentt Views and/or Regions Sheet and available available for export.
The remaining Settings options allow the definition of export Scale, the the appli applicat catio ion n of Cutmarks, whether whether (of a defined Frames are to be exported and if a Border (of width) is required. required. Clicking the Preview button, or where Auto preview is applied applied,, populat populates es the Export Export preview preview area with with the intended export.
To specify advanced export settings for the export, the Advanced checkb checkbox ox is chec checked ked to expa expand nd the the settings settings area to display additional additional export settings. settings.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 342
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Header File Checking the Header File checkbox allows the inclusion of a Header File to the export. The adjacent Browse ( …) button allows an appropriate file to be located.
Blocking Backing Sheets ( Backs), Overlays (Olays) and Fills may be formed into blocks by checking the appropriate checkboxes within the Blocking section. If required, nested blocks may be created by checking the Nested blocks checkbox. If blocks are to be generated using user-defined blocking rules, the Use blocking rules checkbox is checked and the Blocking rules link button clicked to prompt the Blocking Rules form.
The plus button (+) is used used to add add a new Blocking Rule row for completion e.g. a Model element such as EQUI is input as a Block together With a defined criteria to Include attributes such as NAME . Conversely, Conversely, the negative negative button ( -) button deletes a Blocking Rule. A rule may be navigated to in the down arrow buttons. form list by use of the up or down On defining the required settings, the Export button is clicked and a save file location chosen.
17.4 Export to DXF or DWG Selecting the Export to DXF/DWG option from the Export options list alters the Export area to display DXF/DWG specific settings.
The Settings area allows, via an options list, selection of an appropriate file format to ensure compatibility with the intended export software. software.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 343
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Via a Settings options list, the Export Area required can be defined. The option list details details and previews previews the identified identified Sheet and constituent constituent Views and/or Regions available available for export.
Draw Visual Layers Layers for the Sheet are indivi individuall dually y exported to DWG/DXF layers on a one-to-one basis. The remaining Settings and Advanced setting options are the same as covered for Export to DGN On defining the required settings, the Export button is clicked and a save file location chosen.
17.5 Export to Plot File Selecting the Export to Plot File option from the Export options list alters the export area to display Plot File specific settings.
Plot File is very Exporti Exporting ng to Plot very simil similar ar to the the previ previou ously sly described export options. Settings for the Plot File include graphics, window settings Landscape/Portrait orientation and paper sizes.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 344
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
17.6 Export to PNG/JPEG/TIFF/BMP/GIF Selecting Selecting the Export Export to PNG/JP PNG/JPEG/TIF EG/TIFF/BMP/G F/BMP/GIF IF option from the Export options list alters the export area to display PNG/JPEG/TIFF/BMP/GIF specific settings.
The Settings area area allo allows ws,, via via an opti option ons s list list,, selection of an appropriate file format. All of which are commonly used.
Via a Settings options list, the Export Area required can be defined. The option list details and previews the identified Sheet and consti constituen tuentt Views and/or Regions available for export.
Various orientation options are available, including the option to have the image Upside Down where necessary.
As mentioned in previous export options, the Origin Offset setting allows the exported area to be centred at the paper centre or at an explicit position. The General settings checkboxes allow, in turn, the definition of Scale line weight, Auto preview and Show view frames.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 345
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
17.7 Export to SVG/AVEVA.NET Selecting the Export to SVG/AVEVA.NET option from the Export options list alters the export area to display AVEVA NET specific settings. To confi configu gure re the the drawi drawing ng expo export rt to AVEVA. AVEVA.NE NET T the the Settings button is clicked. The Publish Publish to AVEVA AVEVA NET - Configu Configurat ration ion form is displayed.
A Log File may be produced by ensuring a suitable log file location has been defined and the Log Enabled checkbox is checked. The Staging Area textbox allows the user to specify the top level folder into which files are to be exported. The Create Trigger File checkbox sets whether a trigger start file (an empty text file) is created in the staging area folder for each file type. The purpose of the trigger start file is to trigger the AVEVA NET Portal’s import controller to automatically process all the files that reside in the same folder. Clicking Clicking the Settings… button prompts the CAD Configurations form. This form is used to select mapping files for the export of data and specify various settings.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 346
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The mappings between Draw data and AVEVA NET Portal format data are stored in XML files, one for each type of mapping: mapping: Presentation Presentation Mapping, Attribute Mapping and Class Mapping. Additional export settings such as Background colour and Line Thickness (controlled by a Scale Factor) may be specified via the Settings tab:
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 347
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Exer Ex erci cise se 16
Expo Ex port rt
Create a PDF export export of one of the drawings drawings that has been created created through through the training. training. Review the exported PDF.
Create a DXF export export of one of the drawings drawings that has been created created through through the training. training. Experiment with the use of blocking rules. If possible, review the exported drawing and note the translation of Visual Layers.
As an extensio extension n to the the chapter, chapter, select select a View from the Training Drawings and Copy using the Draw Power Wheel. Open a Word document and paste the image directly into the document.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 348
CHAPTER 18 Printing & Plot Styles The following chapter describes the various various facilities facilities available for printing drawings from AVEVA E3D Draw.
18. 8.1 1
Pro roje jec ct Me Menu nu
Printing from AVEVA E3D Draw is performed via the Project tab. Selecting the Print menu option updates the Project area to display a Print options area and Preview window.
The defined print may be a single Draw Sheet ( Print/Plot) or multiple Draw Sheets (Multi Print/Plot).
Clicking Clicking the Multi Prin button prompts prompts the Open browser. browser. The browse browserr allows allows the navigati navigation on and Print/Plot t/Plot button selection of multiple sheets from the Draw hierarchy.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
349
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The key may be used to select multiple sheets in the Open browser. Printer The Printer area area allows the selection of a Printer via an options list and the adjacent Printer Properties link label allows alteration alteration to the identified printer setup.
Draw elements can be written to file using the Print to file checkbox.
Settings The Settings area allows the user to set preferences and settings for the print. The Plot Style options list displays available styles to be applied to the print. Default plot styles available include the following.
Refer er to TM-1 TM-187 870 0 AV EV A Everyt Everything3D hing3D Ref
None
Monochrome
Greyscale
All Fill types as Solid Solid
All Line types as Solid.
™
furthe therr inf informa ormatio tion n on the Draw Administration for fur
creation of user defined plot styles.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 350
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The succeeding Settings options list allows the selection of the Sheet area to be printed. The following options are available.
Display Prints the currently displayed area of the Sheet. Extents Prints the extents of the current Sheet. Window Prin Prints ts a spec specif ifie ied d area area of the the Shee Sheett through cursor selection in the Draw Canvas. Sheet Prints the entire Sheet.
The remaining Settings options influence the print orientation orientation and size.
If the Fit to paper checkbox checkbox is unchecked the user is able able to defi defin ne a cust custo om scal scale e via via the the two two textboxes. The Orientation opti option ons s list list allo allows ws a choi choice ce of Landscape or Portrait Portrait Orientation with paper size defined defined by the subsequent subsequent options list. The Origin Offset setting allows the exported area to be centred at the paper centre or at an explicit position. The General settings checkboxes allow, in turn, the definition of Scale line weight, Auto preview and Show view frames. Clicki Clicking ng the Preview butt button on,, or wher where e Auto applied,, popula populates tes the Print preview preview is applied area with the intended print.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 351
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
18.2 18 .2
Exer Ex erci cise se 17 Prin Printt & Pl Plot ot St Sty yle les s
Using the previous Chapter as a guide complete complete the following following tasks:
Using the created created training training drawings, apply apply a standard Plot Styles Styles and preview the result. result.
If available, available, print print the training drawing drawings s to an A3 printed sheet. sheet.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 352
APPENDIX A Appendix A – Draw Options Appendix A is included for future reference. The information contained therein is available within the AVEVA via the Project menu and Help area, pressing the < F1> key key or by by clickin clicking g Help Files. These may be accessed via the ? Button in the top right area of the module window. There There are severa severall draw options options within within AVEVA Everythin Everything3D g3D that can be manipul manipulate ated d to allow allow persona personall preference. Use the Project tab and select Options, then View.
Please see foundations guide / user manual for overall configuration options.
Any changes that are made will be kept by selecting Apply. If default settings are required the Reset button is selected to display the Reset Settings form. Users can reset groups of settings in isolation or all settings using this form.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
353
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
A.1
Animatio An imation n & Colou Colours rs Sett Settings ings
Selecting the Animation & Colours option updates the Project tab to show settings relating to the displayed canvas and colour.
Animation – Used to set whether or not the user can visualise the movement of zoom extents. Using the slide scale the duration can be altered.
Colours - Changes can be made to an assortme assortment nt of Draw functio functions. ns. Simply Simply select the item to change and click the Modify button.
Used to set the icon to be always placed in the corner of a viewport. When selected the axis will also follow the crosshairs.
Crosshair Colour Mode – one of two colour modes for the crosshair can be selected. If RGB mode is selected, selected, then X axis will be red, the Y axis -green and the Z axis blue.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 354
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
A.2 Dr Draw aw Con Config figura uratio tion n Selecting the Configuration option updates the Project tab to show settings relating to movement actions within the Draw Canvas and view regeneration. regeneration.
Configuration: Realtime Pan Sensi Realtime Sensitivity tivity – Used to control the speed at which the pan action can move the Draw canvas.
Realtime Zoom Sensiti Realtime Sensitivity vity – Used to control the speed at which the zoom action can move the Draw canvas. Curve Vectorization – Used to control curve vectorization precision. Moving the bar to the right will cause more precise curve generation, which may affect performance for extensive drawings. Wheel Zoom Sensitivity – Used to control the mouse wheel speed at which the mouse can zoom in and out of the Draw canvas. Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 355
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Wheel Zoom Smoothing – Used to control the smoothness of the mouse wheel zoom.
Projection – Used to control drawing projection setting.
Automatically regenerates regenerates the view if the view is changed. changed. Regen: Automatically
A.3 Se Selec lectio tion n & Sna Snap p Sett Setting ings s Selecting the Selection & Snaps option updates the Project tab to show settings relating to the selection of Draw elements and drafting aids. Anti-aliasing Anti-aliasing and hints are also controlled controlled from here.
Selection Settings:
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 356
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Pickbox Size – Used to control the pick box size on the cross hair.
Grip Size – Used to control the grip box sizes. Object Snap Settings:
Snap Marker Size – Used to control the size of the snap markers.
Aperture Box Size – Defines the area considered when looking for Object Snap points in proximity to the cross hair. Dynamic Hints Setting: Dynamic Hints Settings – Dynamic hints may be animated. If this option is selected, hints will be drawn with full opacity only when the user is not active (the mouse is still). Turn the option off and the hints will be visible all of the time, regardless of activity. Anti-aliasing: Anti-aliasing Settings – Used to control whether or not anti-aliasing is on or off. Anti-aliasing mode presents an improved visual effect for all entities e.g. lines, polygon polygons, s, segment segments s and texts. texts. Text and grips grips are display displayed ed with with anti-a anti-alia liasing sing by default.
A.4
Object Obj ect Vis Visibil ibility ity Set Settin tings gs
Selecting the Object visibility option updates the Project tab to show settings relating to object visibility and performance.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 357
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Object Visibility: – Determines if an object will be hidden due to its owning visual layer Hide object if – being hidden or if any visual layer relevant to it is hidden. Option to toggle between visual layer is hidden or any relevant layer is hidden
Do not print object if – – Determines if an object will be printed due to its owning visual layer not being printed or any visual layer relevant to the object is not printed
Performance: Performance – Option to toggle between precise and approximate extents calculation
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 358
APPENDIX B Appendix B – Draw Keyboard Commands The below tables highlights common keyboard commands that be may be utilised to invoke Draw functions.
Command
Description Toggles Toggles Function Function Shortcuts Shortcuts – User is presented presented with UI Shortcut Keys.
Sets Drawing as Current Owner in in the Active Properties.
Sets View 1 as Current Owner in in the Active Properties.
Sets View 2 as Current Owner in in the Active Properties.
Selects all elements in canvas.
Prompts the Home > Copy to Clipboard action.
Prompts the Home > Copy with Base Point action.
Get Work
Prompts the Home > Prope Property rty Grid.
Prompts the Project > New Drawing action.
Prompts the Home > New Quick Sheet action.
Prompts the Home > Open Drawing action.
Prompts the Project > Print area.
Save Work
Prompts the Home > Paste from Clipboard Clipboard action.
Prompts the Home > Paste to Original Coordinates Coordinates action.
Closes the current Drawing Closes All open Drawings.
Prompts the Home > Cut to Clipboard action.
Prompts the Home > Redo of an action.
Prompts the Home > Undo of an action.
Minimize Minimize the Ribbon Menu Bar
Deletes current selection.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
359
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Confirms / Completes current action.
Cancels current action / Closes current form.
Command
Description
Prompts the AVEVA Help Viewer .
Clear Canvas
Toggles Object Snap on/off or or Pan Pan mode in Edit in 3D View.
Additional Grips On/Off
Not Used
Not Used
Toggles Grid on/off or toggle between Eye or Model Model rotatio rotation n when in Edit in 3D View.
Wireline Mode when Edit in 3D Toggles Orthogonal Mode on/off or Wireline View.
Grid Snap Mode on/off. Toggles Grid Snap
Toggles Polar Mode on/off.
Not used.
Toggles Dynamic Mode on/off.
Repeat last action / Lock Canvas Editor entry fields. Repeat last action / Move between Canvas Editor entry fields. Navigates through input Canvas entries.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 360
APPENDIX C Appendix C – Draw Canvas Commands
C.1
Directt Canv Direc Canvas as Comm Commands ands
The Table below highlights common commands that be may be entered directly within the 2D Canvas to invoke Draw functions.
Command
Description
ADIM
Prompts the Annotate > Angular Dimension action.
ALIGN
Prompts Label Alignment operation
ANGLE
Prompts the Draw > Angle Measure action.
ARC
Prompts the Draw > Draw Arc action.
ARRAY CANCEL
Prompts the Draw > Array Form .
CHAMFER
Prompts the Draw > Modify Chamfer action. action.
CIRC CLOSE
Cancels the current action.
Prompts the Draw > Draw Circle action.
Closes the current Drawing.
CLOSEALL
Closes All open Drawings.
COPYBASE
Prompts the Home > Copy with Base Point action.
COPYCLIP
Prompts the Home > Copy to Clipboard action.
CUTBASE
Prompts the Home > Cut with Base Point action.
CUTCLIP
Prompts the Home > Cut to Clipboard action.
DELETE
Prompts the Draw > Delete action.
DIST DMND ELLI
Measure action. Prompts the Draw > Distance Measure Prompts the Draw > Draw Diamond action. Prompts the Draw > Draw Ellipse action.
EXCEL
Prompts the Annotate > Import Excel Sheet browser.
ETRI
Prompts the Draw > Draw Equilateral Triangle action.
EXPLODE
Prompts the Draw > Modify Explode action.
EXTEND
Prompts the Draw > Modify Extend action.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
361
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
FILLET
Prompts the Draw > Modify Fillet action.
FILLETR
Radius/Trim /Trim action. Prompts the Draw > Modify Fillet with Radius
Command
Description
GAP
Prompts the Annotate > Insert Gap in Dimension / Label action.
GRIDRULER
Prompts the Annotate > Grid Ruler action. action.
HEXA
Prompts the Draw > Draw Hexagon action.
ID
Sheet Position. Position. Allows identification of Sheet
IMAGE
Prompts the Annotate > Insert Image browser.
LABEL
Prompts the Annotate > Insert Label browser.
LAYER
Prompts the Home > Layers form.
LDIM
Prompts the Annotate > Linear Dimension action.
LENGTHEN
Prompts the Draw > Modify Lengthen action.
LWT
Toggles Canvas Line Width Thickness.
MERGE
Prompts the Draw > Modify Merge action. action.
MIRROR
Prompts the Draw > Modify Mirror action. action.
MOVE
Prompts the Draw > Modify Move action.
MREDO
Prompts the Home > Redo of Multiple actions.
MRKP
Prompts the Annotate > Marker Point action.
Prompts the Navigation Window.
NAVIGATOR
OFFSET
Prompts Draw > Modify Offset action.
OLAY
Prompts the Annotate > Insert Overlay form.
OUTL
Prompts the Draw > Draw Outline action.
PAN PANDIR
Allows Pan Navigation of Sheet.
Allows Directional Pan Navigation of Sheet.
PASTECLIP
Prompts the Home > Paste from Clipboard action.
PASTEORIG
Prompts the Home > Paste to Origin Original al Coordinates action.
PDIM
Prompts Pitch Circular Circular Dimensions. Dimensions.
PICK
Prompts the Pick action.
PLOTSTYLES
Prompts the Home > Plot Styles form.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 362
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
PREV
PRINT
Prompts the Project > Print area.
PROPERTIES QUIT
Returns Canvas to previous view.
Prompts the Home > Property Grid .
Quits the application.
Command
Description
CQVPROJ
Projection View action. Prompts the Home > Create Quick Projection
RAY
Prompts the Draw > Draw Ray Line action.
RDIM
Prompts the Annotate > Radial Dimension action.
RECT REDO REGION REVISION ROTATE SCALE SECV SELALL SETCOLOUR
Prompts Draw > Draw Rectangle action. Prompts the Home > Redo of an action. Prompts the Home > Create Region action.
Control form. Prompts the Manage > Revision Control Prompts the Draw > Modify Rotate about Base Point action. Prompts the Draw > Modify Scale action. Prompts the Home > Create Section View action.
Selects all elements in canvas. Sets the Current Colour in in the Active Properties.
SETLT
Sets the Current Line Type in the Active Properties.
STRA
Prompts the Draw > Draw Straight action.
STYLES
Prompts the Visual Styles form.
SYMB
Prompts the Annotate > Symbol Selection browser.
TABL
Prompts the Annotate > Add Table action.
TANGENT
Prompts the Draw > Draw Tangent action.
TEXP
Prompts the Annotate > Add Text action.
TRIM
Prompts the Draw > Modify Trim action.
STRETCH U UNDO UPDATEDESI
Prompts the Draw > Modify Stretch action. Prompts the Home > Undo action. Prompts the Home > Undo of Multiple actions. Prompts the Update > Update Design action.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 363
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
VDETAIL
Prompts the Home > Create Detail View action.
VIEW
Prompts the Home > Create View action.
VIEWHS
Prompts the Home > Hull View action.
VMODIFY
Prompts the 3D View Tools Tab.
Command
VPROJ
Description
Projection View action. Prompts the Home > Create Projection
VSEC
Prompts the Home > Create View Section action.
WALK
Prompts to set Walk mode in 3D view.
XLINE
Prompts the Draw > Construct XLine action.
ZOOM
Allows Zoom Navigation of Sheet.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 364
APPENDIX D Appendix D – Intelligent Text & Alternative Characters Intelligent Text can be automatically extracted from the Design, Catalogue or Drawing databases to replace the Drawing Intelligent text code words, which begin with a # character. For example a pipe name can be defined as: /ZONE-4/BRANCH-6.
Text
/
Z
O
N
E
-
4
/
B
R
A
N
C
H
-
6
Character No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 11
12
13 13
14 14
15
16 16
Intelligent Text Format
Result
#NAME
/ZONE-4/BRANCH-6
#NAME(C2:)
ZONE-4/BRANCH-6
#NAME(C2:7)
ZONE-4
#NAME(P-2:)
-6
#NAME(P/2:)
/BRANCH-6
#NAME(P2:)
/BRANCH-6
#NAME(P/2:)(C2:)
BRANCH-6
#<
Starts underline
#>
Ends underline
#<#NAME(P/2:)(C2:)
BRANCH-6
#<#NAME(P/2:)(C2:)#> #POSU
BRANCH-6 U3000
#POSU< SU
Returns rns the pos positio tion using zone co-or -ordin dinates tes
#POS #POS< 1>
Retur eturn ns the the posi positi tion on rela relati tive ve to name named d item. tem.
#P1P #P1POS OS< 1>
Retu Return rns s the the posi positi tion on of P1 rela relati tive ve to name named d item item..
#PARA[3]
Navigates Navigates to the catalogu catalogue e element and and returns returns the value of of parameter 3.
#PAR #PARA[ A[3] 3] >
Navi Naviga gate tes s to the the name named d eleme element nt and and retu return rns s para parame mete terr 3.
#HBO #HBORE RE >
Outp Output uts s HBOR HBORE E (hea (head d bore bore)) refe referr rred ed to by the the DDNM DDNM attr attrib ibut ute. e.
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
365
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 #:UDA #:UDA
Outputs Outputs the value of the specified specified User Definable Definable Attribute. Attribute.
The Alternative Character set provides useful symbols for the users. The tilde character ( ~) must precede the required code for the symbol required. Alternative Characters can be used as a single entry or combined with Intelligent Text:
~C produces a Centreline symbol. ~C#POSU produces the Centreline symbol followed by the Up position.
Normal text may be used in combination with Alternative Characters and Intelligent Text:
#<~C#NAME(C2:)#> #<~C#NAME(C2:)# > POSITION POSITION IS #POSU #POSU returns the Centreline symbol and name of the attached element, all underlined, underlined, followed by the defined text i.e. POSITION POSITION IS, and concluded by the element Up position.
Symbol
Code
§
B
Footnote Symbol
C
Centreline Symbol
D
Diameter Symbol
Ø
Description
E F
Steelwork Channel
G
Steelwork Angle
H
Steelwork H-Section
I
Steelwork I-Section
J
Steelwork T-S T-Section
K
Steelwork Double Angle
L
Steelwork H-Section
M
Mu
N
Yen Sign
O
Stee Steelw lwor ork k Holl Hollow ow Circ Circul ular ar Sect Sectio ion n
P
Plate Symbol
©
Q
Copyright Symbol
®
R
Regi egister stered ed Trad Trade emar mark Symb Symbol ol
S
Stee Steelw lwor ork k Holl Hollow ow Rect Rectan angu gula larr Sect Sectio ion n
T
Trademark Symbol
μ
U
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 366
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830 V
Down Arrow
Symbol
Code
Description
Ω
W
Omega
x 1
X
Superscript ‘1’
x 2
Y
Superscript ‘2’
x 3
Z
Superscript ‘3’
x 0
0
Degre egrees es Symb Symbol ol or Supe Supers rscr criipt ‘0’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 *
±
+
─
-
÷
/
Line
<
Left Arrow
>
Right Arrow
[
Much Less Than
]
Much Greater Than
^
Up Arrow
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 367
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
This page is intentionally left blank
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 368
APPENDIX E Appendix E – 2D Drawing Techniques Appendix E is included for future reference. The information contained therein is available within the AVEVA via the Project menu and Help area, pressing the < F1> key key or by by clickin clicking g Help Files. These may be accessed via the ? button in the top right area of the module window. The Draw tab contains contains within within the principal principal drafting tools required required for drawing production.
The functions within the Draw group are covered covered below: below:
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
369
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 370
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The functions within the Modify group are covered below:
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 371
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 372
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
The functions within the Measure group are covered below:
The functions within the Construct group are covered below:
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 373
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 374
AVEVA Everything3D™(2.1) Draw TM-1830
Copyright © 2013. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
www.aveva.com 375